2014 Chevrolet SS Sedan Owner Manual M

Black plate (1,1)Chevrolet SS Sedan Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S.-6014851) - 2014 -1st Edition - 8/22/13

2014 Chevrolet SS Sedan Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-33

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68Bluetooth Phone/Devices . . . . . 7-75Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-15Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-22Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-30Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-35Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-50

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69


2014 Chevrolet SS Sedan Owner Manual M

Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-71Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . 11-12Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-14

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,the CHEVROLET Emblem, SS, andthe SS Emblem are trademarksand/or service marks of GeneralMotors LLC, its subsidiaries,affiliates, or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to your

specific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautions

{ Danger

Text marked{ Danger providesinformation on risk of fatal injury.Disregarding this information mayendanger life.

{ Warning

Text marked{ Warning providesinformation on risk of accident orinjury. Disregarding thisinformation may lead to injury.

{ Caution

Text marked{ Caution providesinformation that may indicate ahazard that could result in injuryor death. It could also result inpossible damage to the vehicle.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 22922170 A First Printing ©2013 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar® (if equipped)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel Overview . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Heated and VentilatedSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-8Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Passenger Sensing System . . . 1-9

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-11Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Vehicle FeaturesSteering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-13Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-15Automatic ParkingAssist (APA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-17Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-18Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview


In Brief 1-3

1. Air Vents on page 8-6.

2. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn andLane-Change Signals onpage 6-3.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Controls. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-21.

3. Paddle Shifter Up. See ManualMode on page 9-24.

4. Cruise Control on page 9-32.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9-44 (If Equipped).

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-40 (IfEquipped).

5. Instrument Cluster on page 5-7.

6. Horn on page 5-3.

7. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2.

8. Paddle Shifter Down. SeeManual Mode on page 9-24.

9. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-3.

10. Ignition. See Ignition Positionson page 9-15.

11. Solar Sensor. See DualAutomatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-1.

12. Infotainment. See Overview onpage 7-2.

13. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6-1.

14. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10-4.

15. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6-4.

16. Head-Up Display (HUD) onpage 5-23.

17. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5-2.

18. Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats on page 3-6.

19. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9-22.

20. Electric Parking Brake onpage 9-27.

21. Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-30.

Front and Rear Parking AssistButton. See AssistanceSystems for Parking or Backingon page 9-36.

Automatic Parking Assist (APA)Button (If Equipped). SeeAssistance Systems forParking or Backing onpage 9-36.

22. Power Outlets on page 5-4(Out of View).

23. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-1.

24. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6-3.

25. CD Player Eject Button.SeeCD Player on page 7-32.


1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter may work up to60 m (197 ft) away from the vehicle.

The RKE transmitter can have oneof the two symbols for the remotetrunk release.

Press this button to extend the key.The key can be used for all locks.

K : Press to unlock the driver dooror all doors.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized.

V orY : Press and hold untilthe trunk begins to move.

7 : Press and release to initiatevehicle locator. Press and hold for atleast three seconds to sound thepanic alarm. Press 7 again tocancel the panic alarm.


In Brief 1-5

/ : Press Q and release and thenimmediately press and hold/ forfour seconds to start the enginefrom outside the vehicle.

See Keys on page 2-1 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.

Remote Vehicle StartWith this feature the engine can bestarted from outside the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ for atleast four seconds or until theturn signal lamps flash.

When the engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2-8.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock the doors from theoutside:

. Press Q or K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2-3.

. Use the key in the driver door.Turn the key toward the rear tolock all doors. Turn the keytoward the front to unlock thedriver door. Turn the key againtoward the front to unlock alldoors.

To lock or unlock the doors from theinside:

. Press Q or K.

. Push the door lock knob on thetop of the door to lock.


1-6 In Brief

. Pull the door handle once tounlock the door. Pulling thehandle again unlatches the door.

See Door Locks on page 2-10 orPower Door Locks on page 2-11.

Windows

Press the switch down to open thewindow. Pull the switch up toclose it.

The power windows only operatewith the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,or when Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9-18.

Express Window Operation

Windows with an express-down orexpress-up feature allow the windowto be lowered or raised withoutholding the switch. Pull a windowswitch up or press it down all theway, release it, and the windowgoes up or down automatically. Stopthe window by pressing or pullingthe switch in the same direction asecond time, or by briefly operatingthe switch to the first detent in eitherdirection.

See Power Windows on page 2-18.

Seat Adjustment

Power Seats

To adjust the seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.


In Brief 1-7

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3-3.

Lumbar Adjustment

To increase or decrease lumbarsupport, slide the switch forward orrearward.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3-4.

Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust the seatback:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3-4.

Memory Features

The SET, "1," "2," and “3” buttonson the driver door are used tomanually save and recall memorysettings for the driver seat andoutside mirrors. These manuallystored positions are referred to asButton Memory positions.

See Memory Seats on page 3-5 andVehicle Personalization onpage 5-33.


1-8 In Brief

Heated and VentilatedSeats

The buttons are below the air ventson the center stack. To operate, theengine must be running.

Press L or M to heat the driver orpassenger seat.

Press { or C to ventilate the driveror passenger seat. A ventilated seathas a fan that pulls or pushes airthrough the seat. The air is notcooled.

See Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats on page 3-6.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints on page 3-2and Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3-3.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3-8.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3-9.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-10.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3-34.


In Brief 1-9

Passenger SensingSystem

The passenger sensing system willturn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag under certain conditions. Noother airbag is affected by thepassenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3-20.

The passenger airbag statusindicator lights in the rearview mirrorare visible when the vehicle isstarted. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5-11.

Mirror Adjustment

Manual Rearview Mirror

Adjust the rearview mirror to viewthe area behind the vehicle.

Push the tab forward for daytimeuse and pull it for nighttime use toreduce glare.

Exterior Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. With the ignition on, press theswitch (2) to select the left orright mirror.

2. Press the arrows (1) to adjustthe mirror.

3. Adjust the mirror to see a little ofthe vehicle, and the area behindthe vehicle.

Keep the switch (2) in the centerwhen not adjusting the mirrors.

Folding Mirrors

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash. Tofold, push the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward toreturn it to its original position.


1-10 In Brief

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel up ordown and in or out for acomfortable position.

3. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the tilt and telescopelever while driving.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamps are in theoverhead console.

+ : Press to turn the lamp onor off.

4 : Press to automatically turn onthe lamps when a door is opened,the vehicle is unlocked, or theignition is turned off.

Reading Lamps

The front reading lamps are in theoverhead console.

Press( or) to turn the lampon or off.


In Brief 1-11

The rear reading lamps are in theheadliner.


For more information on interiorlamps, see:. Dome Lamps on page 6-4. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6-4

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

O : Briefly turn to this position toturn the automatic light control off oron again.

AUTO: Automatic operation of theheadlamps at normal brightness andother exterior lamps.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

5 : Turns on the headlampstogether with the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

See:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6-1. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6-2. Fog Lamps on page 6-3

Windshield Wiper/Washer

With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,move the lever to select the wiperspeed.

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.


1-12 In Brief

INT: Move the windshield wiperlever to INT. Turn thex INT bandon the wiper lever to adjust thesensitivity.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, briefly movethe lever down. For several wipes,hold the lever down.

nL : Pull the lever toward you tospray windshield washer fluid andactivate the wipers.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-3.

Climate ControlsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

1. Driver Temperature Control

2. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

3. Air Conditioning

4. Air Delivery Mode Controls

5. Front Defrost

6. ZONE

7. Passenger Temperature Control

8. Recirculation


In Brief 1-13

9. Fan Control

10. Rear Window Defogger

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-1.

Transmission

Automatic Transmission

P (Park)

R (Reverse)

N (Neutral)

D (Drive)

+ (Plus)/− (Minus): For Sport Shiftmode, move the shift lever toD (Drive), then push to the right.

While in Sport Shift mode, move theshift lever to the + (Plus) or −(Minus) position to enable ActiveSelect mode.

See Automatic Transmission onpage 9-22.

Vehicle Features

Steering Wheel Controls

Some audio functions can becontrolled through the steeringwheel controls.

b / g : Press to interact withBluetooth or voice recognition. SeeBluetooth on page 7-75, OnStarOverview on page 14-1, or VoiceRecognition on page 7-68.


1-14 In Brief

$ /i : Press to decline anincoming call, or to end a currentcall. Press to silence the vehiclespeakers while using theinfotainment system. Press again toturn the sound on. Press to cancelvoice recognition.

_ SRC ^ : Press to select anaudio source.

Use the thumbwheel to select thenext or previous favorite radiostation, CD track, MP3 track, USBtrack, and Bluetooth Audio track.

Use _ SRC to skip to the next songor show using Pandora or Stitcher.See Pandora Internet Radio onpage 7-22 or Stitcher Internet Radioon page 7-27.

+ x −: Press + to increase thevolume. Press − to decrease.

See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2.

Cruise Control

1 : Press to turn the cruise controlsystem on and off.

* : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

RES/+: Move the thumbwheel upbriefly to make the vehicle resumeto a previously set speed or holdupwards to accelerate. If cruisecontrol is already active, use toincrease vehicle speed.

SET/−: Move the thumbwheel downbriefly to set the speed and activatecruise control. If cruise control isalready active, use to decreasespeed.

See Cruise Control on page 9-32.

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is in the center ofthe instrument cluster. It shows thestatus of many vehicle systems. Thecontrols for the DIC are on the turnsignal lever.

1. SET/CLR: Press to set, or pressand hold to clear, the menu itemdisplayed.

2. \: Use the band to scrollthrough the items in each menu.


In Brief 1-15

3. MENU: Press to display the DICmenus. This button is also usedto return to or exit the lastscreen displayed on the DIC.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5-21.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, FCA may help avoid orreduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes. FCA provides agreen indicator when a vehicle isdetected ahead. This indicatordisplays amber if you follow avehicle much too closely. Whenapproaching a vehicle ahead tooquickly, FCA provides a red flashingalert on the windshield and rapidlybeeps.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-40.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW is intended to helpavoid unintentional lane departuresat speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) orgreater. LDW uses a camera sensorto detect the lane markings. TheLDW indicator, @, appears green ifa lane marking is detected. If thevehicle departs the lane, theindicator will change to amber andflash. In addition, beeps will sound.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9-44.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, SBZA will detectvehicles in the next lane over in thevehicle's side blind zone area.When this happens, the SBZAdisplay will light up in thecorresponding outside side mirrorand will flash if the turn signal is on.

See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)on page 9-42.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If equipped, RVC displays a view ofthe area behind the vehicle, on thecenter stack display, when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).

See Assistance Systems for Parkingor Backing on page 9-36.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf equipped, Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) uses sensors on therear bumper to assist with parkingand avoiding objects while inR (Reverse). It operates at speedsless than 8 km/h (5 mph). URPAuses audible beeps to providedistance and system information.

The vehicle may also be equippedwith Front Parking Assist.

See Driver Assistance Systems onpage 9-35.


1-16 In Brief

Automatic ParkingAssist (APA)If equipped, the APA system helpsto search for and maneuver thevehicle into parallel parking spotsusing automatic steering, DICdisplays, and beeps. When thevehicle speed is below 30 km/h(18 mph), press the APA button,O,to enable the system.

See the “Automatic Parking Assist(APA)” information under AssistanceSystems for Parking or Backing onpage 9-36.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle has an accessorypower outlet on the center stack andinside the center console storage.

To use the outlet, the ignition mustbe in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Remove the cover toaccess the outlet and replace whennot in use.

See Power Outlets on page 5-4.

SunroofIf equipped, the sunroof switchesare on the overhead console. Theignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) to operatethe sunroof. See Ignition Positionson page 9-15 and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9-18.

Open/Close: Press and hold thefront or rear of the switch (1) toopen or close the sunroof. Thesunshade automatically opens withthe sunroof, but must be closedmanually.

Express Open: Press and releasethe front of the switch (1) toexpress-open the sunroof.

Vent/Close: Press and hold therear of the switch (2) to vent thesunroof. Press and hold the frontof the switch (2) to close.


In Brief 1-17

The sunroof cannot be opened orclosed if the vehicle has anelectrical failure.

Anti-Pinch Feature

If an object is in the path of thesunroof when it is closing, theanti-pinch feature detects the objectand stops the sunroof from closingat the point of the obstruction. Thesunroof then returns to the full-openposition.

See Sunroof on page 2-20.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControlThe traction control system limitswheel spin. The system turns onautomatically every time the vehicleis started.

The StabiliTrak system assists withdirectional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions. Thesystem turns on automatically everytime the vehicle is started.. To turn off traction control, press

and release the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton g on the center console.i illuminates in the instrumentcluster.

. Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button again to turnon traction control.

. To turn off both traction controland StabiliTrak, press and holdthe TCS/StabiliTrak button g on

the center console, until i andg illuminate in the instrumentcluster.

. Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button again to turnon both systems.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-30.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,


1-18 In Brief

stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9-10.The warning light will remain on untilthe tire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10-42.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.

The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Display the REMAINING OILLIFE on the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-21.

2. Press and hold the SET/CLRbutton on the DIC while the OilLife display is active. The oil lifewill change to 100%.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-8.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.


In Brief 1-19

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

BatteryThe battery is located in the trunk,behind a trim panel, on the driverside. When it is time for a newbattery, see your dealer for one thathas the replacement number shownon the original battery's label.

See Battery on page 10-20.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-243-8872

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

As the owner of a new Chevrolet,you are automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13-5.

OnStar®

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices. See OnStar Overview onpage 14-1.


1-20 In Brief

2 NOTES


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-8Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-11Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

DoorsTrunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-15

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-17Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . 2-17Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keys in theignition, and children or otherscould be caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with theignition key.


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

The key that is part of the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter canbe used for all locks.

Press the button on the RKEtransmitter to extend the key. Pressthe button to retract the key.

See your dealer if a new key isneeded.

If it becomes difficult to turn the key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13-5.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview on page 14-1.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.



Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe RKE transmitter may work up to60 m (197 ft) away from the vehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2-2.

The RKE transmitter can have oneof these two symbols for the remotetrunk release.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound toindicate locking. See “Remote LockFeedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5-33. If apassenger door is open when Q ispressed, all doors lock. If the driverdoor is open when Q is pressed, alldoors lock except the driver door.These settings can be modified.See “Open Door Anti Lock Out”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-33.

Pressing Q may also arm thetheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2-14.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedriver door or all doors. See“Remote Door Unlock” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-33. The turn signalindicators flash to indicate unlockinghas occurred. See “Remote UnlockFeedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5-33.Pressing K may also disarm thetheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2-14.

V orY (Remote TrunkRelease): Press and hold until thetrunk begins to move.

7 (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release onetime to initiate vehicle locator. Theexterior lamps flash and the hornchirps three times. Press and hold7 for at least three seconds tosound the panic alarm. The hornsounds and the turn signals flash



until 7 is pressed again or the keyis placed in the ignition and turnedto ON/RUN.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Pressand release Q then immediately

press and hold/ for at leastfour seconds to start the enginefrom outside the vehicle using theRKE transmitter. See RemoteVehicle Start on page 2-8.

Keyless Access Operation

Some vehicles have a KeylessAccess system that lets you lockand unlock the doors withoutremoving the RKE transmitter fromyour pocket, purse, briefcase, etc.The RKE transmitter should bewithin 1 m (3 ft) of the door beingopened. If the vehicle has thisfeature, there will be buttons on theoutside door handles.

The vehicle can be customized toalways unlock all doors on the firstlock/unlock button press. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-33.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromthe Driver Door

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)of the driver door handle, pressingthe lock/unlock button on the driverdoor handle will unlock the driverdoor. If the lock/unlock button ispressed again within five seconds,all passenger doors will unlock. Pullthe door handle to unlatch the door.

Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:. It has been more than

five seconds since the first lock/unlock button press.

. Two lock/unlock button presseswere used to unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has beenopened and all doors are nowclosed.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromthe Passenger Doors

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)of the door handle, pressing thelock/unlock button on a passengerdoor handle will unlock all doors.Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:. The lock/unlock button was used

to unlock all doors.



. Any vehicle door has beenopened and all doors are nowclosed.

Passive Locking

This feature will lock the vehicleseveral seconds after all doors areclosed, if the vehicle is off and atleast one RKE transmitter has beenremoved from the interior or noneremain in the interior.

Temporary Disable of PassiveLocking Feature

Temporarily disable the passivelocking by pressing and holding Kon the interior door switch with adoor open for at least four seconds,or until three chimes are heard.Passive locking will then remaindisabled until Q on the interior dooris pressed, or until the vehicle isturned on.

To customize the doors toautomatically lock when exiting thevehicle, see “Remote Lock/Unlock/Start” under Vehicle Personalizationon page 5-33.

Keyed Access

To access a vehicle with a deadtransmitter battery, see Door Lockson page 2-10.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.The vehicle can be reprogrammedso that lost or stolen transmitters nolonger work. Any remainingtransmitters will need to bereprogrammed. Each vehicle canhave up to eight transmittersmatched to it.

Programming with a RecognizedTransmitter

A new transmitter can beprogrammed to the vehicle whenthere is one recognized transmitter.To program, the vehicle must be off

and all of the transmitters, bothcurrently recognized and new, mustbe with you.

1. Place the recognized transmitterin the transmitter pocket. Thetransmitter pocket is inside thecenter console storage area.



2. Insert the new vehicle key intothe key lock cylinder on thedriver door handle and turn thekey, counterclockwise, to theunlock position five times within10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays READY FORREMOTE #2, 3, 4 or 5.

3. Remove the recognizedtransmitter and place the newtransmitter into the transmitterpocket.

4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button. When thetransmitter is learned, the DICwill show that it is ready toprogram the next transmitter.

5. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter pocket and press K.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 3–5.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdthe ENGINE START/STOPbutton for 10 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

Programming without aRecognized Transmitter

If there are no currently recognizedtransmitters available, follow thisprocedure to program up to eighttransmitters. This procedure willtake approximately 30 minutes tocomplete. The vehicle must be offand all of the transmitters you wishto program must be with you.

1. Insert the vehicle key into thekey lock cylinder on the driverdoor handle and turn the key,counterclockwise, to the unlockposition five times within10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays REMOTE LEARNPENDING, PLEASE WAIT.

2. Wait for 10 minutes until the DICdisplays PRESS ENGINESTART BUTTON TO LEARNand then press the ENGINESTART/STOP button.

The DIC displays will againshow REMOTE LEARNPENDING, PLEASE WAIT.



3. Repeat Step 2 two additionaltimes. After the third time, allpreviously known transmitterswill no longer work with thevehicle. Remaining transmitterscan be relearned during the nextsteps.

The DIC display shouldnow show READY FORREMOTE # 1.

4. Place the new transmitter intothe transmitter pocket. Thetransmitter pocket is inside thecenter console storage area.

5. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button. When thetransmitter is learned the DICwill show that it is ready toprogram the next transmitter.

6. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter pocket and press K.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 4–6.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdthe ENGINE START/STOPbutton for 10 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery

If the transmitter battery is weak, theDIC may display NO REMOTEDETECTED when you try to startthe vehicle. The REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage may also be displayed atthis time.

To start the vehicle:

1. Open the center console storageand place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket.

2. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral), press the brakepedal and press the ENGINESTART/STOP button.

See Starting the Engine onpage 9-17

Replace the transmitter battery assoon as possible.



Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC. SeeKey and Lock Messages onpage 5-29.

{ Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

The battery is not rechargeable. Toreplace the battery:

1. Press the button on thetransmitter to extend the key.

2. Remove the battery cover byprying with a finger.

3. Remove the battery by pushingon the battery and sliding ittoward the key blade.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Push the batterydown until it is held in place.Replace with a CR2032 orequivalent battery.

5. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartRemote start allows the engine tobe started from outside the vehicle.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Theremote start button is on the RKEtransmitter.

The climate control system will usethe previous settings during aremote start.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsrequire a person using remote startto have the vehicle in view. Checklocal regulations for anyrequirements.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2-2.



Starting the Vehicle

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ for atleast four seconds or until theturn signal lamps flash. The turnsignal lamps flashing confirmsthe request to remote start thevehicle has been received.

When the engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps toextend to 20 minutes. Remote startcan be extended only once.

Start the vehicle before driving.

Extending Engine Run Time

To extend to 20 minutes, repeatSteps 1–3 while the engine is stillrunning. The remote start can beextended once.

For example, if the engine has beenrunning for five minutes, and theremote start is extended, the enginewill run for a total of 20 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts,or a single start with an extension,is allowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must beturned on and then back off beforethe remote start procedure can beused again.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if:. The vehicle is unlocked.. The hood is not closed.. The hazard warning flashers

are on.. The malfunction indicator lamp

is on.. The engine coolant temperature

is too high.. The oil pressure is low.. Two remote vehicle starts, or a

single remote start with anextension, have alreadybeen used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).



Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanent

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

injuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

To lock or unlock the doors from theoutside:

. Press Q or K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2-3.

. Use the key in the driver door.Turn the key toward the rear tolock all doors. Turn the keytoward the front to unlock thedriver door. Turn the key againtoward the front to unlock alldoors.

To lock or unlock the doors from theinside:. Pushing down the manual lock

knob on the driver door will lockall doors. Pushing down themanual lock knob on apassenger door will lock thatdoor only.

. Pull the door handle once tounlock the door. Pulling thehandle again unlatches the door.

. Press Q or K on the power doorlock switch.



Power Door Locks

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.

Delayed LockingThis feature will delay the actuallocking of the doors and arming ofthe theft-deterrent system forfive seconds when the door lockswitch or Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter is used tolock the vehicle.

If any door is open when locking thevehicle, three chimes will signal thatthe delayed locking feature is active.Five seconds after the last door isclosed, all of the doors will lock. Tocancel the delay and lock the doorsimmediately, press Q on the RKEtransmitter or the power door lockswitch a second time. Thetheft-deterrent system will arm after30 seconds.

Automatic Door LocksThe vehicle is programmed to lockall doors automatically when thefollowing are met:. All doors are closed.. The ignition is on.. The vehicle is shifted out of

P (Park).

All doors will unlock when thevehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Lockout ProtectionIf the vehicle is in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/STARTand the power door lock switch ispressed with the driver door open,all the doors will lock and only thedriver door will unlock.

If Open Door Anti Lockout is turnedon and the vehicle is off, the driverdoor is open, and locking isrequested, all the doors will lock andonly the driver door will unlock. TheOpen Door Anti Lockout feature canbe turned on or off using the vehiclepersonalization menus. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-33.

Lockout Protection can be manuallyoverridden with the driver door openby pressing and holding Q on thepower door lock switch.



Safety Locks

The rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

Pressv { to activate the safetylocks on the rear doors. Theindicator light in the switch willilluminate when activated.

The rear door power windows arealso disabled. See Power Windowson page 2-18.

Pressv { again to deactivate thelockout switch.

If an inside rear door handle isbeing pulled when the safety lock isdeactivated, that door will remainlocked and the indicator light mayflash. Release the handle, thenpress the safety lock twice todeactivate the safety locks.

Doors

Trunk

{ Warning

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate or trunk/hatch open,or with any objects that passthrough the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch orliftgate. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

See Engine Exhaust onpage 9-21.

Trunk Release

To open the trunk the vehicle mustbe off or the shift lever must be inP (Park).

From inside the vehicle, press|on the driver door.

Remote Trunk Release

From outside the vehicle, press andholdV orY on the RKEtransmitter.

Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle

{ Caution

Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down oranchor point when securing itemsin the trunk as it could damagethe handle.

The emergency trunk releasehandle is behind the center rearseat. To access, press the button atthe top of the center seat to unlock



the seatback and fold down. Pull therelease handle sideways to openthe trunk from the inside.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm SystemThis vehicle has an anti-theft alarmsystem.

The security light, on the instrumentpanel near the windshield, indicatesthe status of the system:

Off: Alarm system is disarmed.

On Solid: Vehicle is securedduring the delay to arm the system.

Fast Flash: Vehicle is unsecured.A door, the hood, or the trunkis open.

Slow Flash: Alarm system isarmed.

Arming the Alarm System

1. Turn off the vehicle.

2. Lock the vehicle with one of thefollowing:. Use the RKE transmitter.

. With a door open, press Qon the interior of the door.

3. After 30 seconds the alarmsystem will arm, and theindicator light will begin to slowlyflash indicating the alarm systemis operating. Pressing Q on theRKE transmitter a second timewill bypass the 30-second delayand immediately arm the alarmsystem.

The vehicle alarm system will notarm if the doors are locked withthe key.

If the driver door is opened withoutfirst unlocking with the RKEtransmitter, the horn will chirp andthe lights will flash to indicate apre-alarm. If the vehicle is notstarted, or the door is not unlockedby pressing K on the RKE



transmitter during the 10-secondpre-alarm, the alarm will beactivated.

The alarm will also be activated ifthe passenger door, the trunk, or thehood is opened without firstdisarming the system. When thealarm is activated, the turn signalsflash and the horn sounds for about30 seconds. The alarm system willthen re-arm to monitor for the nextunauthorized event.

Disarming the System

To disarm the system, do one of thefollowing:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Start the engine.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. Lock the vehicle with the RKE

transmitter after all occupantshave exited.

. Always unlock the vehicle withthe RKE transmitter, or use theKeyless Access system.Unlocking the driver door withthe key will not disarm thesystem or turn off the alarm.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The immobilizer activates itselfautomatically after the key has beenremoved from the ignition switch,if equipped with Keyless Access,when the engine is switched off bypressing the ENGINE START/STOPbutton.

The system checks whether thevehicle is allowed to start with thekey used. If the transponder in thekey is recognized, the vehicle canbe started.

The security light in the instrumentcluster comes on when there is aproblem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.

The system has one or moretransmitters matched to animmobilizer control unit in yourvehicle. Only a correctly matchedtransmitter will start the vehicle.If the transmitter is ever damaged,you may not be able to start yourvehicle.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.



If the vehicle does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn thevehicle off and try again.

If the RKE transmitter appears to beundamaged, try another transmitteror if equipped with Keyless Access,place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket in the centerconsole. See “Starting the Vehiclewith a Low Transmitter Battery”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-3.

If the vehicle does not start with theother transmitter or when thetransmitter is in the pocket in thecenter console, see your dealer.

Do not leave the transmitter thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system, in thevehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. With the ignition on, press theswitch (2) to select the left orright mirror.

2. Press the arrows (1) to adjustthe mirror.

3. Adjust the mirror to see a little ofthe vehicle, and the area behindthe vehicle.

Keep the switch (2) in the centerwhen not adjusting the mirrors.



Folding Mirrors

Manual Folding Mirrors

The vehicle has manual foldingmirrors. These mirrors can be foldedinward to prevent damage whengoing through an automatic carwash. To fold, pull the mirror towardthe vehicle. Push the mirror outwardto return it to the original position.

Heated MirrorsThe vehicle has heated outsiderearview mirrors.

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-1.

Automatic DimmingMirrorThe driver outside mirrorautomatically adjusts for the glare ofheadlamps behind you.

Reverse Tilt MirrorsIf equipped with memory seats, theoutside mirrors have a reverse tiltfeature. This feature tilts the outsidemirrors to a preselected positionwhen the vehicle is in R (Reverse).This allows the driver to view thecurb for parallel parking. The mirrorsreturn to their original position whenthe vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), the ignition is turnedoff, or if the vehicle reverse speedexceeds 10 km/h (6 mph).

This feature can be turned on or offthrough the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-33. SeeMemory Seats on page 3-5.

Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind yourvehicle.

If equipped with OnStar, there arethree buttons at the bottom of themirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and howto subscribe to OnStar. See OnStarOverview on page 14-1.

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe rearview mirror automaticallydims to reduce the glare of theheadlamps from behind. Thisfeature comes on when the vehicleis started.



Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. When there are childrenin the rear seat, use the windowlockout button to preventoperation of the windows. SeeKeys on page 2-1.

The power window switches on thedriver door control all the windows.Each passenger door has a switchthat controls only that window.

Power window switches work whenthe ignition is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9-18.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the switch to raise thewindow.

Express Window Operation

Windows with an express-down orexpress-up feature allow the windowto be lowered or raised withoutholding the switch. Pull a windowswitch up or press it down all theway, release it, and the windowgoes up or down automatically. Stopthe window by pressing or pullingthe switch in the same direction asecond time, or by briefly operatingthe switch to the first detent in eitherdirection.



Express Window Anti-PinchFeature

If an object is in the path of thewindow when the express-up isactive, the window will stop at theobstruction and auto-reverse to apreset factory position. Weatherconditions such as severe icing maycause the window to auto-reverse.The window will return to normaloperation after the obstruction orcondition is removed.

Rear Window Lockout

Presso { to prevent rear seatpassengers from operating thewindows. The indicator lightilluminates when on. Press again toturn the feature off. This alsoactivates the safety locks on therear passenger doors.

Programming the PowerWindows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged or disconnectedand the windows cannot be closedautomatically, a warning messagewill display in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). To reprogram thewindows:

1. The ignition must be in ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY,or Retained AccessoryPower (RAP).

2. Press and hold the powerwindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull the power window switch upuntil the window is fully closedand keep holding the switch upfor an additional two seconds.

4. Repeat for each window.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. If equipped, detach the sunvisor from the center mount to pivotto the side window or to extendalong the rod.



Roof

SunroofOn vehicles with a sunroof, theswitches used to operate it are onthe overhead console. The ignitionmust be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) to operatethe sunroof. See Ignition Positionson page 9-15 and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9-18.

Open/Close: Press and hold thefront or rear of the switch (1) toopen or close the sunroof. Thesunshade automatically opens withthe sunroof, but must be closedmanually.

Express Open/Close: Press andrelease the front or rear of theswitch (1) to express-open orexpress-close the sunroof.

Vent/Close: Press and hold therear of the switch (2) to vent thesunroof. Press and hold the front ofthe switch (2) to close.

The sunroof cannot be opened orclosed if the vehicle has anelectrical failure.

Anti-Pinch Feature

If an object is in the path of thesunroof when it is closing, theanti-pinch feature detects the objectand stops the sunroof from closingat the point of the obstruction. Thesunroof then returns to the full-openposition.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsPower Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-3Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Rear SeatsRear SeatPass-Through Door . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-12Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-12Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-15When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-25

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-25Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-31Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-32Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-41


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsFront Seats

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

The vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

To raise or lower the head restraint,press the button located on the sideof the head restraint, and pull up orpush the head restraint down, andrelease the button. Pull and push onthe head restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not designed to beremoved.



Rear Seats

The vehicle’s rear seats have headrestraints in the outboard seatingpositions that cannot be adjusted.

The rear seat outboard headrestraints are not designed to beremoved.

Front Seats

Power Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust the seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks on page 3-4.

To adjust the lumbar support, seeLumbar Adjustment on page 3-4.



Lumbar Adjustment

To increase or decrease lumbarsupport, slide the control forward orrearward.

Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust the seatback:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.



Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Memory Seats

The SET, "1," "2," and “3” buttonson the driver door are used tomanually save and recall memorysettings for the driver seat andoutside mirrors. These manuallystored positions are referred to asButton Memory positions.

Storing Button Memory Positions

To save positions into ButtonMemory for the “1,” “2,” or “3” drivingpositions:

1. Adjust the driver seat andoutside mirrors to the desireddriving positions.

2. Press and release SET, thenimmediately press and hold "1"until a beep sounds.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for asecond driver using “2” and/or athird driver using “3.”

Recalling Button MemoryPositions

Press and hold "1," "2," or “3” torecall the manually saved ButtonMemory positions. Releasing "1,”"2," or “3” before the storedpositions are reached stops therecall.

If the ignition is in ON/RUN/STARTand the vehicle is parked, brieflypress and release “1,” “2,” or “3” torecall the Button Memory positions.



Turning the vehicle off before thestored positions are reached stopsthe recall.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling a memoryposition, the recall may stop.Remove the obstruction; then pressand hold the appropriate manualcontrol for the memory item that isnot recalling for two seconds. Tryrecalling the memory position againby pressing the appropriate memorybutton. If the memory position is stillnot recalling, see your dealer forservice.

Heated and VentilatedFront Seats

{ Warning

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should use

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

care when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

The buttons are below the air ventson the center stack. To operate, theengine must be running.

Press L or M to heat the driver orpassenger seat.

Press { or C to ventilate the driveror passenger seat. A ventilated seathas a fan that pulls or pushes airthrough the seat. The air is notcooled.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The indicator lightson the buttons indicate three for thehighest setting and one for thelowest. If the heated seats are onhigh, the level may automatically belowered after approximately30 minutes.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.



Remote Start Heated andVentilated Seats

During a remote start, the heated orventilated seats can be turned onautomatically. When it is coldoutside, the heated seats turn on,and when it is hot outside theventilated seats turn on. The heatedor ventilated seats are canceledwhen the ignition is turned on. Pressthe heated or ventilated seat buttonto use the heated or ventilated seatsafter the vehicle is started.

The heated or ventilated seatindicator lights do not turn on duringa remote start.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

The heated or ventilated seats willnot turn on during a remote startunless they are enabled in thevehicle personalization menu. SeeRemote Vehicle Start on page 2-8and Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-33.

Rear Seats

Rear SeatPass-Through Door

The rear seat has an armrest in thecenter of the seatback. Pull thearmrest down to lower it. To fold, liftthe armrest up and push it rearwarduntil it is flush with the seatback.

The rear seat has a rear seatpass-through door in the center ofthe rear seatback. Press the buttonon top of the seatback and fold thecenter part of the seatback down toaccess the trunk. There are twocupholders on the door. To close, liftthe pass-through door and push itrearward until it locks into place.



Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5-9.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the



safety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3-26 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3-28.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.



. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of a rearseat passenger belt is pulled outall the way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.



If the webbing locks in the latchplate before it reaches thebuckle, tilt the latch plate flat tounlock.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3-12.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal,near-frontal, or rear crash if thethreshold conditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, if thevehicle has side impact airbags,safety belt pretensioners can helptighten the safety belts in a sidecrash or a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probably



other parts of the vehicle's safetybelt system will need to be replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash on page 3-13.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Never

use it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. See the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5-9.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3-13.



Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in a

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

crash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-10.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A knee airbag for the driver.. A knee airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger.

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on a labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For knee airbags, the word AIRBAGis on the lower part of theinstrument panel.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3-17.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.



{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children onpage 3-26 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3-28.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument cluster, whichshows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag electricalsystem for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-10.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.



The driver knee airbag is below thesteering column. The front outboardpassenger knee airbag is below theglove box.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and frontoutboard passenger are in the sideof the seatbacks closest to the door.

Passenger Side Shown, DriverSide Similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, andsecond row outboard passengersare in the ceiling above the sidewindows.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object into

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

that person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped withairbags. See Airbag System onpage 3-14. Airbags are designed toinflate if the impact exceeds thespecific airbag system’s deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants. The vehicle haselectronic frontal sensors that helpthe airbag system determine theseverity of the impact. Deploymentthresholds can vary with specificvehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.

It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, inrear impacts, or in many sideimpacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasadvanced technology frontalairbags. Advanced technologyfrontal airbags adjust the restraintaccording to crash severity.

The vehicle also has seat positionsensors that enable the sensingsystem to monitor the position of thedriver seat and the front outboardpassenger seat. Seat positionsensors provide information that isused to adjust the deployment of thefrontal airbags.



Knee airbags are designed to inflatein moderate to severe frontalimpacts. Knee airbags are notdesigned to inflate during vehiclerollovers, in rear impacts, or in manyside impacts.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare designed to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes, dependingon the location of the impact.Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not designed to inflate in frontalimpacts, near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis designed to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.

Roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes, depending on the locationof the impact. In addition, theseroof-rail airbags are designed toinflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Roof-railairbags are not designed to inflate inrear impacts. Both roof-rail airbagswill inflate when either side of thevehicle is struck or if the sensing

system predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over on its side, or in asevere frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3-15.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steering

wheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3-17.



Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3-15.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out of

the windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps, turn on thehazard warning flashers, and shut

off the fuel system after the airbagsinflate. You can lock the doors, turnoff the interior lamps, and turn offthe hazard warning flashers byusing the controls for thosefeatures.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.



Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13-13 and Event DataRecorders on page 13-14.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean that

an airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light in the rearview mirror whenthe vehicle is started.

The words ON and OFF will bevisible during the system check.When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON orOFF will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 5-11.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag under certain conditions. Noother airbag is affected by thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag should be allowedto inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Whenever possible, children age12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.



{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger airbag(s), nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notinflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag(s) are off.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag(s) are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger airbag andknee airbag if:. The front outboard passenger

seat is unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a childrestraint.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag, the off indicatorwill light and stay lit to remind youthat the airbags are off. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5-11.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag anytime the systemsenses that a person of adult size issitting properly in the front outboardpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbags tobe enabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit as a reminder that theairbags are active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn



off the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag and knee airbag,depending upon the person’sseating posture and body build.Everyone in the vehicle whohas outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-10 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag if the systemdetermines that an infant is presentin a child restraint. If a child restrainthas been installed and the onindicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat) on page 3-39 or SecuringChild Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) on page 3-41.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3-2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off theairbags for a child in a childrestraint depending upon thechild's size. It is better to securea child restraint in a rear seat.



If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. Use thefollowing steps to allow the systemto detect that person and enable thefront outboard passenger frontal andknee airbags:


2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers. Alsoremove laptops or otherelectronic devices.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbagwill not be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk of

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

serious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboardpassenger seat, if the passengerairbag off indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing system



operates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-25 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here’s how:. The passenger sensing system

may turn off the passengerairbag when liquid is soaked intothe seat. If this happens, the offindicator will be lit, and theairbag readiness light will alsobe lit.

. Liquid pooled on the seat thathas not soaked in may make itmore likely that the passengersensing system will turn on thepassenger airbag while a childrestraint or child occupant is on

the seat. If the passenger airbagis turned on, the on indicator willbe lit.

If the front passenger seat gets wet,dry it immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not install achild restraint or allow anyone tooccupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-10 forimportant safety information.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop,or other electronic device, is put onan unoccupied seat. If this is notdesired, remove the object fromthe seat.

{ Warning

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13-11.

{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to follow

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

proper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end or side sheetmetal, may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Theoperation of the airbag system canalso be affected by changing ormoving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, the airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, any airbagmodule, ceiling or pillar garnish trim,the inside rearview mirror, frontsensors, side impact sensors,or airbag wiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery or trim, or withGM covers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort enhancing pador device, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3-20.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels on page 10-50 foradditional important information.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andhave questions about whether themodifications will affect the vehicle'sairbag system, or if you havequestions about whether the airbagsystem will be affected if the vehicleis modified for any other reason, callCustomer Assistance. SeeCustomer Assistance Offices onpage 13-3.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-10.



{ Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbagmay not work properly. Do notopen or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbagcovering and/or airbag modulereplaced. For the location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3-15. See yourdealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may not

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-10.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.



The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, return to the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.



{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided byappropriate child restraints. Neitherthe vehicle's safety belt system norits airbag system is designedfor them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.



{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child's



weight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturerinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. In acrash, if an infant is in arear-facing child restraint, thecrash forces can be distributedacross the strongest part of aninfant's body, the back andshoulders. Infants should alwaysbe secured in rear-facing childrestraints.

{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected by

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

any bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.



Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.

Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.



Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3-34.

Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.



Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front passengerairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thefront passenger airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontpassenger frontal airbag, no

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

system is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3-20 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.



Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. The LATCH system isdesigned to make installation of achild restraint easier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. LATCH-compatiblerear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installedusing either the LATCH anchors orthe vehicle’s safety belts. Do notuse both the safety belts and theLATCH anchorage system to securea rear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.

Booster seats use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the child inthe booster seat. If the manufacturer

recommends that the booster seatbe secured with the LATCH system,this can be done as long as thebooster seat can be positionedproperly and there is no interferencewith the proper positioning of thelap-shoulder belt on the child.

Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint,and also the instructions in thismanual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

The LATCH anchorage system canbe used until the combined weightof the child plus the child restraint is29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety beltalone instead of the LATCHanchorage system once thecombined weight is more than29.5 kg (65 lbs).

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).



Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top ofthe child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (2) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a singleattachment (2) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with toptethers are designed for use with orwithout the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. Besure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

I (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

H (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.



To assist in locating the loweranchors, each seating position withlower anchors has two labels, nearthe crease between the seatbackand the seat cushion.

To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is near the anchor.

1. Outboard Lower Anchors

2. Center Lower Anchors

The outboard lower anchors (1) arebehind the vertical openings in theseat trim. The center loweranchors (2) are in the creasebetween the seatback and the seatcushion.

The top tether anchors are on therear seatback filler panel. Be sure touse an anchor on the same side ofthe vehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3-32 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ Warning

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, the

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

child could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ Warning

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

{ Caution

Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3-32.

This system is designed to makethe installation of child restraintseasier. When using lower anchors,do not use the vehicle's safety belts.Instead, use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.



1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestraint and you are usinga single tether, route thetether over the seatback.

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestraint and you are usinga dual tether, route thetether over the seatback.



If the position you are usinghas a fixed head restraintand you are using a singletether, route the tether overthe head restraint.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetheraround the head restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side to side and back

and forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement for proper installation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-34 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3-34 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requires



that the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3-32.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle safety belt through or

around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-34 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3-32.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag under certainconditions. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 3-20 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5-11 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.



{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger airbag(s), nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notinflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag(s) are off.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag(s) are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-34 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see for top tetheranchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or if

the instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal andknee airbags, the off indicator onthe passenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen the vehicle is started. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5-11.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.



3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.



7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3-20 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2

Additional Storage FeaturesConvenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

StorageCompartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in storage compartments.In a crash, these objects maycause the cover to open andcould result in injury.

Glove BoxLift up on the glove box lever toopen it.

Cupholders

The front cupholders are in thecenter console.


4-2 Storage

Pull the rear armrest down toaccess the rear cupholders.

The vehicle has cupholders in frontof the center seat.

To open, push in the front of thecover and release it.

To close, slide the cupholder backinto the seat until the latch engages.

Center Console Storage

There is storage under the centerconsole armrest. To open, press thelatch and lift up. Do not force the lidbackwards. There is a power outletinside.

See Power Outlets on page 5-4.


Storage 4-3

Additional StorageFeatures

Convenience Net

If equipped, the convenience net isin the rear. Put small loads behindthe net. It can also be positionedinto an envelope style to holdsmaller items. The net is not forheavier loads. Store items as farforward as you can.

Attach four corner loops (1) to thetop two hooks on the vehicle (twoloops on one side, two loops on theother) and attach the two centerloops (2) to the bottom hooks on thevehicle.

The net can be opened and objectsplaced inside.

For larger objects, place a cornerloop (1) on each hook.


4-4 Storage

2 NOTES


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 5-9Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-10Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Charging System Light . . . . . . . 5-11MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Service Vehicle SoonLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Service Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 5-17Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-17Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-18

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-18Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-19Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-20Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-20

Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-20Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-20Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-23

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-26Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-27Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-27Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-28Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-28Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-28Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-29Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-31


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-32Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-32Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-33

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel up ordown and in or out for acomfortable position.

3. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the tilt and telescopelever while driving.


Some audio functions can becontrolled through the steeringwheel controls.

b / g (Push to Talk): Press tointeract with Bluetooth or voicerecognition. See Bluetooth onpage 7-75, OnStar Overview onpage 14-1, or Voice Recognition onpage 7-68.



$ /i (Mute/End Call): Press todecline an incoming call, or to end acurrent call. Press to silence thevehicle speakers while using theinfotainment system. Press again toturn the sound on. Press to cancelvoice recognition.

_ SRC ^ (Thumbwheel Control):Press to select an audio source.

Use the thumbwheel to select thenext or previous favorite radiostation, CD track, MP3 track, USBtrack, and Bluetooth Audio track.

Use _ SRC to skip to the next songor show using Pandora or Stitcher.See Pandora Internet Radio onpage 7-22 or Stitcher Internet Radioon page 7-27.

+ x − (Volume): Press + toincrease the volume. Press − todecrease.

Horn

Pressa on the steering wheel padto sound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,move the windshield wiper lever toselect the wiper speed.

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.

INT (Rainsense Wipe SensitivityControl): Move the windshieldwiper lever to INT. Turn thex INTband on the wiper lever to adjust thesensitivity.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 (Mist): For a single wipe, brieflymove the wiper lever down. Forseveral wipes, hold the wiperlever down.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades and windshield before usingthem. If frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them.Damaged blades should bereplaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10-23.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor.

Rainsense™

With Rainsense, a sensor near thetop center of the windshield detectsthe amount of water on thewindshield and controls thefrequency of the windshield wiper.



Keep this area of the windshieldclear of debris to allow for bestsystem performance.

INT (Rainsense Wipe SensitivityControl): Move the windshieldwiper lever to INT. Turn thex INTband on the wiper lever to adjust thesensitivity.

. Turn the band up for moresensitivity to moisture.

. Turn the band down for lesssensitivity to moisture.

. Move the windshield wiper leverout of the INT position todeactivate Rainsense.

nL (Windshield Washer): Pullthe windshield wiper lever towardyou to spray windshield washer fluidand activate the wipers. The wipers

will continue until the lever isreleased or the maximum wash timeis reached. When the windshieldwiper lever is released, additionalwipes may occur depending on howlong the windshield washer hadbeen activated. See Washer Fluidon page 10-17 for information onfilling the windshield washer fluidreservoir.

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

Clock

Time and Date

1. Press HOME on the radiofaceplate.

2. Press the Config screen buttonon the Home Page.

3. Select Time and Date.

4. Select the desired setting tochange.

Set Time: Press + or − to increaseor decrease the hours and minutes.

If auto timing is set, the timedisplayed on the clock may notupdate immediately when drivinginto a new time zone.

Set Date: Press + or − to increaseor decrease the year, month,and day.

12hr/24hr Format: Press to select12 hour or 24 hour time format.

Press the Back screen buttonto save.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle has an accessorypower outlet on the center stack andinside the center console storage.



To use the outlet, the ignition mustbe in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Remove the cover toaccess the outlet and replace whennot in use.

{ Caution

Leaving electrical equipment onfor extended periods will drain thebattery. Always turn off electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum amperagerating.

This circuit is protected by a fuseand has a maximum current level.Do not use equipment exceedingthe maximum amperage rating.

Certain power accessory plugs maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

{ Caution

Adding any electrical equipmentto the vehicle may damage it orkeep other components fromworking as they should. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not useequipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of10 amperes. Check with yourdealer before adding electricalequipment.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9-50.

{ Caution

Hanging heavy equipment fromthe power outlet can causedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. The poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.



Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can show how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-21.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

{ Caution

If the engine is operated with thetachometer in the shaded warningarea, the vehicle could bedamaged, and the damageswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Do not operatethe engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

Fuel Gauge

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge shows how much fuel is leftin the fuel tank. When the indicatornears empty, a message in theDriver Information Center (DIC)displays. See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5-28. Thevehicle still has a little fuel left, butthe vehicle should be fueled soon.An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. These arenormal and do not indicate aproblem with the fuel gauge:. At the service station, the gas

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thefuel tank was half full, but itactually took a little more or lessthan half the fuel tank's capacityto fill it.



. The indicator moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

If the indicator needle moves to thehot side of the gauge, the engine istoo hot.

If the vehicle has been operatedunder normal driving conditions, pulloff the road, stop the vehicle, andturn off the engine as soon aspossible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentcluster.

When the vehicle is started this lightflashes and a chime comes on toremind drivers to fasten their safetybelt. Then the light stays on soliduntil the belt is buckled. This cyclemay continue several times if the

driver remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

When the vehicle is started this lightflashes and a chime may come onto remind the front passenger tofasten their safety belt. Then thelight stays on solid until the belt isbuckled. This cycle may continueseveral times if the passengerremains or becomes unbuckledwhile the vehicle is moving.

If the front passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.



The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat suchas a briefcase, handbag, grocerybag, laptop, or other electronicdevice. To turn off the warning lightand/or chime, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.

Second Row Passenger BeltReminder Light

Second row seating positionsmonitored for safety belt use arerepresented by a colored symbol inthe Driver information Center (DIC)indicating safety belt status. Whenthe vehicle is started, three safetybelt symbols come on and stay onfor several seconds in theinstrument cluster to alert the driver

that passengers may need to fastentheir safety belts. After thepassenger safety belt is buckled,the corresponding safety beltsymbol in the instrument clusterturns green. If a safety belt is notinitially buckled, the instrumentcluster displays a gray safety beltsymbol. While the vehicle is moving,if a second row passenger that waspreviously buckled becomesunbuckled, the corresponding safetybelt symbol will change to flashingred and a chime may sound.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system, the pretensioners,the airbag modules, the wiring, andthe crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag Systemon page 3-14.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.



Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThis vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3-20 forimportant safety information. Therearview mirror has a passengerairbag status indicator.

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF for severalseconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, thestatus indicator will light either ONor OFF to let you know the status ofthe front outboard passenger frontalairbag and knee airbag.

If the word ON is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, itmeans that the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag are allowed to inflate.

If the word OFF is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced right

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

away. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-10 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.The light turns off when the engineis started. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there could be aproblem with the electrical charging



system. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, helping tomaintain a clean environment. Themalfunction indicator lamp comeson when the vehicle is placed inService Only Mode, as a check toshow it is working. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. See Ignition Positions onpage 9-15.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on while the engine isrunning, this indicates that theOBD II system has detected aproblem and diagnosis and servicemight be required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system alsoassists the service technician incorrectly diagnosing anymalfunction.

{ Caution

If the vehicle is continually drivenwith this light on, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

the vehicle fuel economy mightnot be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs thatmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system of the vehicle orthe replacement of the originaltires with other than those of thesame Tire Performance Criteria(TPC) can affect the vehicle'semission controls and can causethis light to come on.Modifications to these systemscould lead to costly repairs notcovered by the vehicle warranty.This could also result in a failure

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-2.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to stop and park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,

follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemission control systemmalfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9-48. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,

stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It may require at least one full tankof the proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9-46.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Depending on where you live, yourvehicle may be required toparticipate in an emission controlsystem inspection and maintenanceprogram. For the inspection, the



emission system test equipment willlikely connect to the vehicle's DataLink Connector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe vehicle is placed in ServiceOnly Mode and the malfunctionindicator lamp does not comeon. See your dealer forassistance in verifying properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Service Vehicle SoonLight

For vehicles with this light, it comeson if a condition exists that mayrequire the vehicle to be taken in forservice.

If the light comes on, take thevehicle to your dealer for service assoon as possible.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.



If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

This light comes on briefly when thevehicle is turned on. If it does notcome on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn if there is aproblem.

If the light comes on and stays on,there is a base brake problem.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on after

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Electric Parking BrakeLight

The parking brake status lightcomes on when the brake isapplied. If the light continuesflashing after the parking brake isreleased, or while driving, there is aproblem with the electric parkingbrake system. A message may alsodisplay on the Driver Information

Center (DIC). See Brake SystemMessages on page 5-26 for moreinformation.

If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, see your dealer.

Service Electric ParkingBrake Light

The service electric parking brakelight should come on briefly whenthe vehicle is in ON/RUN. If it doesnot come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

If this light stays on, there is aproblem with a system on thevehicle that is causing the parkingbrake system to work at a reducedlevel. The vehicle can still be driven,but should be taken to a dealer assoon as possible. See Electric



Parking Brake on page 9-27. If amessage displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC), see BrakeSystem Messages on page 5-26.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off.

If the light comes on while driving,stop as soon as it is safely possibleand turn off the vehicle. Then startthe engine again to reset thesystem. If the ABS light stays on,or comes on again while driving, the

vehicle needs service. A chime mayalso sound when the light comes onsteady.

If the ABS light is the only light on,the vehicle has regular brakes, butthe antilock brakes are notfunctioning.

If both the ABS and the brakesystem warning light are on, thevehicle's antilock brakes are notfunctioning and there is a problemwith the regular brakes. See yourdealer for service.

See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5-14 and Brake SystemMessages on page 5-26.

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light

This light comes on green when thesystem is on and ready to operate.When the system determines thatthe vehicle is leaving its lanewithout using the turn signal, thislight will change to amber and flash.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9-44.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) Warning Light

The forward collision alert comes onand warns when a vehicle is beingrapidly approached.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-40 for moreinformation.



Vehicle Ahead Indicator

If equipped, this light displays greenwhen a vehicle is detected ahead.

This light will display amber whenyou are following a vehicle aheadmuch too closely.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-40.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton.

This light and the StabiliTrak OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.


StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If the StabiliTrak and TCS are off,the system does not assist incontrolling the vehicle. Turn on theTCS and the StabiliTrak systemsand the warning light turns off.




Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS, and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled. A DICmessage may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the indicator/warning light is onand flashing, the TCS and/or theStabiliTrak system is activelyworking.


Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Tire Messages onpage 5-31. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeTire Pressure on page 10-41.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-43.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

oil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, but ifthe oil level is within the operatingrange and the oil pressure is stilllow, have the vehicle serviced.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehicle

could be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light is near the fuel gauge andcomes on briefly when the ignition isturned on as a check to show it isworking.

It also comes on when the fuel tankis low on fuel. The light turns offwhen fuel is added. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operationon page 2-15.



High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6-1.

Front Fog Lamp Light

For vehicles with fog lamps, thislight comes on when the fog lampsare on.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6-3 for moreinformation.

Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on when theexterior lamps are in use. SeeExterior Lamp Controls on page 6-1.

Cruise Control Light

For vehicles with cruise control, thecruise control light is white when thecruise control is on and ready, andturns green when the cruise controlis set and active.

The light turns off when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9-32.

Door Ajar Light

If equipped, this light comes onwhen a door is open or not securelylatched. Before driving, check thatall doors are properly closed. SeeDoor Ajar Messages on page 5-27.



Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC displays information aboutthe vehicle. It also displays warningmessages if a system problem isdetected. See Vehicle Messages onpage 5-26. All messages appear inthe DIC display in the center of theinstrument cluster.

The vehicle may also have featuresthat can be customized through thecontrols on the radio. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-33.

DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displays,which can be accessed by using theDIC buttons on the turn signal leverto the left of the steering wheel. TheDIC displays trip, fuel, vehiclesystem information, and warningmessages if a system problem isdetected.

1. SET/CLR: Press to set, or pressand hold to clear, the menu itemdisplayed.

2. \: Use the band to scrollthrough the items in each menu.

3. MENU: Press to display the DICmenus. This button is also usedto return to or exit the lastscreen displayed on the DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

Press MENU on the turn signallever until Trip/Fuel Menu isdisplayed. Use\ to scroll throughthe following possible menu items:. Digital Speedometer. Trip. Fuel Range. Average Fuel Economy

. Instantaneous Fuel Economy

. Average Vehicle Speed

. Navigation

Digital Speedometer

The speedometer, available onsome vehicles, shows how fast thevehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). The speedometercannot be reset.

Trip

This display shows the currentdistance traveled in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), sincethe last reset for the trip odometer.The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing SET/CLR while thetrip odometer display is showing.

Fuel Range

This display shows the approximatedistance the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. The fuel rangeestimate is based on an average ofthe vehicle's fuel economy over



recent driving history and theamount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. Fuel range cannot be reset.

Average Fuel Economy

This display shows the approximateaverage liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles per gallon(mpg). This number is calculatedbased on the number of L/100 km(mpg) recorded since the last timethis menu item was reset. The fueleconomy can be reset by pressingSET/CLR while the Average FuelEconomy display is showing. Onsome models, this display is shownon the same page with theinstantaneous fuel consumptiondisplay.

Instantaneous Fuel Economy

The instantaneous fuel consumptiondisplay shows the current fueleconomy in liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This numberreflects only the fuel economy thatthe vehicle has right now andchanges frequently as driving

conditions change. Unlike averagefuel economy, this display cannot bereset. On some models, this displayis shown on the same page with theaverage fuel economy display.

Average Vehicle Speed

This display shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value. The averagespeed can be reset by pressingSET/CLR while the Average VehicleSpeed display is showing.

Navigation

This display shows the Navigationinformation when guidance isselected.

Vehicle Information Menu Items

Press MENU on the turn signallever until Vehicle Information menuis displayed. Use\ to scrollthrough the following possible menuitems:. Battery Voltage. Speed Warning. Tire Pressure Monitoring. Remaining Oil Life. Units

Battery Voltage

This display, available on somevehicles, shows the current batteryvoltage. If the voltage is in thenormal range, the value will display.For example, the display may readBattery Voltage 15.0 Volts. Thevehicle's charging system regulatesvoltage based on the state of thebattery. The battery voltage canfluctuate while viewing thisinformation on the DIC. This isnormal. See Charging System Light



on page 5-11. If there is a problemwith the battery charging system,the DIC will display a message.

Speed Warning

This display is used to set thevehicle speed at which the speedwarning chime sounds and the alertis displayed. The speed can be setby pressing SET/CLR while thespeed warning display is showing.

Tire Pressure Monitoring

This display will show a vehicle withthe approximate pressures of allfour tires. Tire pressure is displayedin either kilopascal (kPa) or poundsper square inch (psi). See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10-43.

Remaining Oil Life

This display shows an estimate ofthe oil's remaining useful life. If 99%is displayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.

See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5-28. The oil should bechanged as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil on page 10-6. In additionto the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in theMaintenance Schedule. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-2.

Remember, the Remaining Oil Lifedisplay must be reset after each oilchange. It will not reset itself. Also,be careful not to reset the Oil Lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,press SET/CLR while the Oil Lifedisplay is active. See Engine OilLife System on page 10-8.

Units

Move\ to switch between metricor US when the Units display isactive. Press SET/CLR to confirmthe setting. This will change the

displays on the cluster and DIC toeither metric or English (US)measurements.

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{ Warning

If the HUD image is too bright ortoo high in your field of view, itmay take you more time to seethings you need to see when it isdark outside. Be sure to keep theHUD image dim and placed low inyour field of view.

With HUD, some informationconcerning the operation of thevehicle is projected onto thewindshield. The image is projectedthrough the HUD lens on top of theinstrument panel. The informationappears as an image focused outtoward the front of the vehicle.



{ Caution

If you try to use the HUD imageas a parking aid, you maymisjudge the distance anddamage your vehicle. Do not usethe HUD image as a parking aid.

The HUD may display some of thefollowing alerts or information forvehicles equipped with thesefeatures:. Speedometer. Tachometer. High Beam Indicator Symbol. Forward Collision Alert Warnings. Audio Functions. Navigation. Transmission Position. Shift Up Meter. Cruise Control Active

The HUD control is to the left of thesteering wheel.

To adjust the HUD image:

1. Adjust the driver seat.

2. Start the engine.

Use the following settings to adjustthe HUD.

$ (Image Adjustment): Pressdown or up to center the HUDimage. The HUD image can only beadjusted up and down, not sideto side.

PAGE (Display View): Press toselect the display view. Turnclockwise or counterclockwise to

brighten or dim the display. Turncompletely counterclockwise to turnthe display off.

The HUD image will automaticallydim and brighten to compensate foroutside lighting. The HUDbrightness control can also beadjusted as needed.

The HUD image can temporarilylight up depending on the angle andposition of the sunlight on the HUDdisplay. This is normal.

Polarized sunglasses could makethe HUD image harder to see.

HUD Views

There are four HUD pages that canbe viewed in the HUD display.

Page one displays:



Page two displays:

Page three displays:

Page four displays:

Care of the HUD

Clean the inside of the windshield toremove any dirt or film that couldreduce the sharpness or clarity ofthe HUD image.

Clean the HUD lens with a soft clothsprayed with glass cleaner. Wipethe lens gently, then dry it.

HUD Troubleshooting

Check that:. Nothing is covering the

HUD lens.. HUD brightness setting is not

too dim or too bright.. HUD is adjusted to the proper

height.. Polarized sunglasses are

not worn.. Windshield and HUD lens are

clean.

If the HUD image is not correct,contact your dealer.

The windshield is part of the HUDsystem. See WindshieldReplacement on page 10-24.



Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may display one after theother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing SET/CLR. The messagesthat require immediate action cannotbe cleared until that action isperformed. All messages should betaken seriously and clearing themessages does not correct theproblem.

The following are some of thevehicle messages that may bedisplayed depending on yourvehicle content.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thevehicle has detected that the batteryvoltage is dropping beyond areasonable point. The battery saversystem starts reducing features ofthe vehicle that may be noticed. Atthe point that features are disabled,this message displays. Turn offunnecessary accessories to allowthe battery to recharge.

LOW BATTERY

This message is displayed when thebattery voltage is low. See Batteryon page 10-20.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

This message is displayed whenthere is a fault in the batterycharging system. Take the vehicle toyour dealer for service.

Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW

This message displays when thebrake fluid level is low. See BrakeFluid on page 10-19.

RELEASE PARKING BRAKE

This message displays if the electricparking brake is on while the vehicleis in motion. Release it beforeattempting to drive. See ElectricParking Brake on page 9-27.

SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST

This message displays when thereis a problem with the brake boostsystem. When this messagedisplays, the brake pedal may beharder to push and the stoppingdistance may be longer. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

SERVICE PARKING BRAKE

This message displays when thereis a problem with the parking brake.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.



STEP ON BRAKE TORELEASE PARK BRAKE

This message displays whenattempting to release the electricparking brake without the brakepedal applied. See Electric ParkingBrake on page 9-27.

Cruise Control Messages

CRUISE SET TO XXX

This message displays when thecruise control is set and shows thespeed it was set to. See CruiseControl on page 9-32.

Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thedriver door is open. Close the doorcompletely.

HOOD OPEN

This message will display when thehood is open. Close the hoodcompletely.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thedriver side rear door is open. Closethe door completely.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thefront passenger door is open. Closethe door completely.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thepassenger side rear door is open.Close the door completely.

TRUNK OPEN

This message will display when thetrunk is open. Close the trunkcompletely.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

A/C OFF DUE TO HIGHENGINE TEMP

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor automatically turns off.When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the airconditioning compressor turns backon. The vehicle can continue to bedriven.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

ENGINE OVERHEATED —IDLE ENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.



ENGINE OVERHEATED —STOP ENGINE

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays whenservice is required for the vehicle.See your dealer. See Engine Oil onpage 10-6 and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-2.

Acknowledging the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message willnot reset the system. See“Remaining Oil Life” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-21 and Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 10-8.

ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays when the engine oil levelmay be too low. Check the oil levelbefore filling to the recommendedlevel. If the oil is not low and thismessage remains on, take thevehicle to your dealer for service.See Engine Oil on page 10-6.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

This message displays when thevehicle's engine oil pressure is low.The oil pressure light also appearson the instrument cluster. SeeEngine Oil Pressure Light onpage 5-18.

Stop the vehicle immediately, asengine damage can result fromdriving a vehicle with low oilpressure. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer as soon as possiblewhen this message is displayed.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceedto your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refuel assoon as possible



Key and Lock Messages

NO REMOTE DETECTED

This message displays when thetransmitter battery is weak onvehicles with Keyless Access. See“Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays when thebattery in the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter needs to bereplaced. See “BatteryReplacement” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.

USE TRANSMITTER POCKETTO START

This message displays when tryingto start the vehicle if an RKEtransmitter is not detected. Thetransmitter battery may be weak.See “Starting the Vehicle with a Low

Transmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.

Lamp Messages

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROLON/OFF

This message is displayed when theautomatic light control has beenturned on or off. See AutomaticHeadlamp System on page 6-2.

CHECK XXX TURNSIGNAL LAMP

When one of the turn signals is out,this message displays to showwhich bulb needs to be replaced.See Bulb Replacement onpage 10-24 and Replacement Bulbson page 10-25.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message is displayed if theturn signal has been left on. Turn offthe turn signal.

Object Detection SystemMessages

FORWARD COLLISIONALERT OFF

This message displays when theForward Collision Alert has beenturned off.

FRONT CAMERA BLOCKEDCLEAN WINDSHIELD

This message displays when thecamera is blocked. Cleaning theoutside of the windshield behind therearview mirror may correct theissue. The Lane Departure Warningsystem will not operate. ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) may not workor may not work as well.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNINGUNAVAILABLE

This message displays whenattempting to activate the LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) system



when it is temporarily unavailable.The LDW system does not needservice.

This message could be due to thecamera being blocked. Cleaning theoutside of the windshield behind therearview mirror may correct theissue.

PARK ASSIST OFF

This message displays when theParking Assist system has beenturned off or when there is atemporary condition causing thesystem to be disabled.

REAR CROSS TRAFFICALERT OFF

This message displays when theRear Cross Traffic Alert has beenturned off.

SERVICE FRONT CAMERA

If this message remains on aftercontinued driving, the vehicle needsservice. Do not use the LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) and

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)features. Take the vehicle to yourdealer.

SERVICE PARKING ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Parking Assistsystem. Do not use this system tohelp you park. See your dealer forservice.

SERVICE SIDE DETECTIONSYSTEM

If this message remains on aftercontinued driving, the vehicle needsservice. Side Blind Zone Alert(SBZA) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA) features will not work. Takethe vehicle to your dealer.

SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT OFF

This message indicates that thedriver has turned the Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system off.

SIDE DETECTION SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE

This message indicates that SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA) and RearCross Traffic Alert (RCTA) aredisabled either because the sensoris blocked and cannot detectvehicles in the blind zone, or thevehicle is passing through an openarea, such as the desert, wherethere is insufficient data foroperation. This message may alsoactivate during heavy rain or due toroad spray. The vehicle does notneed service. For cleaning, see"Washing the Vehicle" underExterior Care on page 10-72.



Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Controlon page 9-30.

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak system.See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-30.

Security Messages

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the vehicledetects a tamper condition.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE AC SYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the air conditioningsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message displays if there is aproblem with the power steeringsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message displays if there is aproblem with the vehicle. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10-43 for more information.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem is learning new tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 10-43 for more information.

TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADDAIR TO TIRE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low.

There is also an icon with thewarning that will indicate thelocation of the low tire.

The low tire pressure warning lightwill also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5-18.

If a tire pressure message displays,inflate the tires until the tire pressureis equal to the values shown on theTire and Loading Information label.See Tires on page 10-34, VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-10, and TirePressure on page 10-41.



More than one tire pressuremessage can be received at a time.To read the other messages thatmay have been sent at the sametime, press the SET/CLR button.The DIC also shows the tirepressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-21.

Transmission Messages

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays if there is aproblem with the transmission. Seeyour dealer.

SHIFT DENIED

This message displays when usingthe Active Select mode andattempting to shift to a gear notappropriate for the vehicle speedand engine revolutions perminute (rpm). See Manual Mode onpage 9-24.

SHIFT TO PARK

This message displays when thetransmission needs to be shifted toP (Park). This may appear whenattempting to remove the RKEtransmitter from the vehicle if thevehicle is not in P (Park).

TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLEENGINE

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when iceconditions are possible.

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message may display when thewasher fluid level is low. SeeWasher Fluid on page 10-17.

Window Messages

OPEN, THEN CLOSE DRIVER/PASSENGER WINDOW

This message is displayed when thewindow needs to be reprogrammed.If the vehicle's battery has beenrecharged or disconnected, you willneed to program each front windowfor the express-up feature to work.See Power Windows on page 2-18.



VehiclePersonalizationUse the audio system controls toaccess the personalization menusfor customizing vehicle features.

The following are all possiblepersonalization features. Dependingon the vehicle, some may not beavailable.

HOME: Press to display the HomePage screen.

TUNE/MENU: Press to entermenus and select menu items. Turnto scroll through the menus.

/ BACK: Press to exit or movebackward in a menu.

Entering the PersonalizationMenus

The ignition must be in the ONposition.

1. Press HOME.

2. Select the Config screen button.

3. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the desired setting.

4. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toselect the desired setting menu.

The following list of menu items maybe available:. Languages. Time and Date. Radio Settings. Phone Settings. Navigation Settings. Display Settings. Vehicle Settings

Each menu is detailed in thefollowing information. Alternatively,the touch screen may be used toselect.

Languages

Select Languages, then select fromthe available language(s).

Time and Date

To adjust the time and date settings,see Clock on page 5-4.

Radio Settings

Select and the following maydisplay:. Auto Volume. Gracenote Options. XM Channel Art. Max Startup Volume. Number of Favorite Pages. XM Categories. Software Version Menu

Auto Volume

When selected, this feature willautomatically adjust the volume tominimize the effects of unwantedbackground noise that can resultfrom changing road surfaces, drivingspeeds, or open windows. Thisfeature works best at lower volume



settings where background noise istypically louder than the soundsystem volume.

Select OFF, Low, Medium, or High.

Gracenote Options

Select to improve voice recognitionand media groupings.

Select to enable or disable. See CDPlayer on page 7-32, USB onpage 7-34, Auxiliary Devices onpage 7-40, and Bluetooth Audio onpage 7-41.

XM Channel Art

When on, the radio willautomatically update the XM screenand background graphics.

Select On or Off.

Max Startup Volume

Select the maximum volume level atstartup even if a higher volume hadbeen set when the radio wasturned off.

Number of Favorite Pages

Select to set the number of FAVpages to be displayed.

XM Categories

Select or deselect any category tobe used in XM mode.

Software Version Menu

Select to display information aboutthe system and software.

Phone Settings

See “Phone” in Configure Menu onpage 7-60.

Navigation Settings

See Configure Menu on page 7-60.

Display Settings

Select and the following maydisplay:. Home Page Menu. Rear Camera Options. Display Off. Map Settings

Home Page Menu

Select to customize the first page ofthe Home Page.

Rear Camera Options

Select to adjust the rear cameraoptions.

Display Off

Select to turn off the display. Thedisplay will return when any buttonis pressed or the screen is touched.

Map Settings

Select to enter the submenu tochange Automatic Zoom, enableSpeed Limit display on map, andchange Map Display settings.. Map Display: Select to change

the screen background.

To change the overall brightnesssetting for the display, use thevehicle interior lightinginstrument panel illuminationcontrol.



‐ The Automatic setting adjuststhe screen backgroundautomatically depending onthe exterior lighting conditions.

‐ The Day setting brightens themap background.

‐ The Night setting darkens themap background.

. Speed Limits: Select to displaythe posted speed limit on themap, when available.

Vehicle Settings

Select and the following maydisplay:. Climate and Air Quality. Comfort and Convenience. Collision/Detection Systems. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Remote Lock/Unlock/Start. Return to Factory Settings?

Climate and Air Quality

Select and the following maydisplay:. Auto Fan Speed. Remote Start Auto Cool Seat. Remote Start Auto Heat Seat

Auto Fan Speed

This feature sets the climate controlfan speed to maintain the interiortemperature.

Select High, Medium, or Low.

Remote Start Auto Cool Seat

When on and it is hot outside, theventilated seats will turn onautomatically.

Select to turn on or off.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seat

When on and it is cold outside, theheated seats will turn onautomatically.

Select to turn on or off.

Comfort and Convenience

Select and the following maydisplay:. Chime Volume. Button Chime. Reverse Mirror Tilt

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Select Normal or High.

Button Chime

This allows the button chimes to beturned on or off.

Select On or Off.

Reverse Mirror Tilt

This allows the reverse mirror tilt tobe set to on or off.

Select On or Off.



Collision/Detection Systems

Select and the following maydisplay, if equipped:. Park Assist. Side Blind Zone Alert. Rear Cross Traffic Alert

Park Assist

This allows the Parking Assistfeature to be turned on or off. SeeDriver Assistance Systems onpage 9-35.

Select On or Off.

Side Blind Zone Alert

This allows the Side Blind ZoneAlert feature to be turned on or off.See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)on page 9-42.

Select On or Off.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

This allows the Rear Cross TrafficAlert feature to be turned on or off.See Assistance Systems for Parkingor Backing on page 9-36.

Select On or Off.

Lighting

Select and the following maydisplay:. Vehicle Locator Lights. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

When on, the headlamps andback-up lamps will flash when K ispressed.

Select On or Off.

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Select Off, 30 Seconds, 1 Minute,or 2 Minutes.

Power Door Locks

Select and the following maydisplay:. Open Door Anti Lock Out

. Auto Door Unlock

. Delayed Door Lock

Open Door Anti Lock Out

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thedoor is open. If off, the DelayedDoor Lock menu will be available.

Select On or Off.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows the selection of whichdoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Select All Doors, Driver Door, or Off.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors. To override thedelay, press the power door lockswitch on the door.

Select On or Off.

Remote Lock/Unlock/Start

Select and the following maydisplay:. Remote Unlock Feedback



. Remote Lock Feedback

. Remote Door Unlock

. Passive Door Unlock

. Passive Door Lock

. Remote Left in Veh. Reminder

Remote Unlock Feedback

If equipped, this allows the selectionof what type of feedback is givenwhen unlocking the vehicle with theRKE transmitter.

Select On or Off.

Remote Lock Feedback

This allows the selection of whattype of feedback is given whenlocking the vehicle with the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

Select Lights and Horn, Lights Only,Horn Only, or Off.

Remote Door Unlock

This allows the selection of whichdoors will unlock when pressing Kon the RKE transmitter.

Select All Doors or Driver DoorOnly. When set to Driver Door Only,the driver door will unlock the firsttime K is pressed and all doors will

unlock when K is pressed a secondtime. When set to All Doors, all ofthe doors will unlock with the firstpress of K.

Passive Door Unlock

This allows the selection of whatdoors will unlock when using thebutton on the driver door to unlockthe vehicle.

Select All Doors or DriverDoor Only.

Passive Door Lock

This allows passive locking to beturned on or off and selectsfeedback. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-3.

Select On with Horn Chirp, On,or OFF.

Remote Left in Veh. Reminder

This feature sounds an alert whenthe RKE transmitter is left in thevehicle.

Select On or Off.

Return to Factory Settings?

Select to return all vehiclepersonalization to the defaultsettings.

Select Yes or No.



2 NOTES


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-5

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

There are four positions:

O (Off): Briefly turn to this positionto turn the automatic light control offor on again.

AUTO (Automatic): Automaticoperation of the headlamps atnormal brightness and other exteriorlamps.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps including all lamps,except the headlamps.

5 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps together with the parkinglamps and instrument panel lights.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerThe headlamps must be on for thisfeature to work.

Push the turn signal lever awayfrom you to turn the high beams on.

The3 indicator light turns on in theinstrument cluster when thehigh-beam headlamps are on.

Push the lever away from you toreturn to low beams.

Flash-to-PassTo flash the high beams, pull thelever toward you. The lamps remainon high beam as long as the leveris held.


6-2 Lighting

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of your vehicle duringthe day.

The DRL system makes theheadlamps come on at a reducedbrightness when the followingconditions are met:. The engine is running.. The exterior lamp control is

in AUTO.. Shift lever is out of (P) position.. The light sensor determines it is

daytime.

When the DRL are on, the taillamps,instrument panel lights, and otherlamps will not be on.

The headlamps automatically switchfrom DRL to the regular headlampsdepending on the darkness of thesurroundings. See “AutomaticHeadlamp System” following.

To turn off the DRL, turn the exteriorlamp control to O and then release.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside andthe exterior lamp control is in theautomatic position, the headlampsand parking lamps will turn on andoff automatically. See Exterior LampControls on page 6-1.

There is a light sensor on top of theinstrument panel. Do not cover thesensor; otherwise the headlampswill come on when they are notneeded.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps turn off.

The automatic headlamp systemturns off when the exterior lampcontrol is turned toP or the ignitionis off.

The automatic headlamp systemdefaults to on with each ignitioncycle.


Lighting 6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press this button on the centerstack near the audio system, tomake the front and rear turn signallamps flash on and off. Press againto turn the flashers off.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

Move the turn signal lever all theway up or down to signal a turn.

An arrow on the instrument clusterflashes in the direction of the turn orlane change.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is completed. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, theturn signal flashes three times.

The turn signal can be turned offmanually by moving the lever backto its original position.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange, the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out.

Have any burned out bulbsreplaced. If a bulb is not burned out,check the fuse. See Fuses onpage 10-26.

Fog LampsTo turn on the fog lamps, the ignitionand the headlamps or parking lampsmust be on.

If the fog lamps are turned on whilethe exterior lamp control is in theAUTO position, the headlampscome on automatically.

# (Fog Lamps): Press to turn onor off. An indicator light on theinstrument cluster comes on whenthe fog lamps are on.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.


6-4 Lighting

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

This feature controls the brightnessof the instrument panel controls andinfotainment display screen. Thethumbwheel is to the left of thesteering column on the instrumentpanel.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): Move thethumbwheel up or down to brightenor dim the instrument panel controlsand infotainment display screen.

Dome Lamps

The dome lamps are in theoverhead console.

+ (On/Off): Press to turn the lampon or off.

4 (Door): Press to automaticallyturn on the lamps when a door isopened, the vehicle is unlocked,or the ignition is turned off.

When the interior lamps are set todoor activated, they operateautomatically only when it is dark.

The lamps dim to off after all doorsare closed. They turn off about10 minutes after the ignition isturned off. They turn off immediatelyif the ignition is turned on and alldoors are closed.

Reading LampsFront Reading Lamps

The front reading lamps are in theoverhead console.



Lighting 6-5

Rear Reading Lamps

The rear reading lamps are in theheadliner.


Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe headlamps, parking lamps,taillamps, back-up lamps, and mostof the interior lamps turn on brieflywhen K is pressed on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.After about 30 seconds the exteriorlamps turn off, and then the domeand remaining interior lamps will dimto off.

This feature can be changed. See“Vehicle Locator Lights” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-33.

Exit LightingThe exterior lamps will illuminate anarea with limited lighting for a setamount of time when the ignition isturned to LOCK/OFF.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-33.

Battery Power ProtectionTo prevent the battery from beingdrained, the glove box, trunk, andreading lamps automatically turn off10 minutes after the ignition isturned off.

The lamps are reactivated if any ofthe following occur:. The ignition is turned on.. The vehicle is unlocked.. The trunk is opened.


6-6 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Radio Data System (RDS) . . . 7-14Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-21Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-21Quick Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

Pandora Internet Radio . . . . . . 7-22Stitcher Internet Radio . . . . . . . 7-27Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

NavigationUsing the NavigationSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42

Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46Navigation Symbols . . . . . . . . . 7-46Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48OnStar® DestinationDownload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59

Configure Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60Global PositioningSystem (GPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66

Vehicle Positioning . . . . . . . . . . 7-66Problems with RouteGuidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67

If the System NeedsService . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68

Map Data Updates . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68Database CoverageExplanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68

Voice RecognitionVoice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68

Bluetooth Phone/DevicesBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75Text Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82

Trademarks and LicenseAgreementsTrademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85


7-2 Infotainment System

Introduction

InfotainmentRead the following pages tobecome familiar with theinfotainment system features.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention to infotainmenttasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non-audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9-3.

{ Caution

Contact your dealer before addingany equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere with theoperation of the engine, radio,or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-18 for moreinformation.

OverviewRead the following pages tobecome familiar with theinfotainment system features.

The infotainment system has built-infeatures intended to help with thisby disabling some functions whendriving. A grayed out function is notavailable when the vehicle ismoving.

All functions are available when thevehicle is parked. Before driving:. Become familiar with the

infotainment system operation,buttons on the faceplate, andtouch-sensitive screen buttons.

. Set up the audio by presettingfavorite stations, setting thetone, and adjusting thespeakers.

. Set up phone numbers inadvance so they can be calledeasily by pressing a singlebutton or by using a single voicecommand for vehicles equippedwith phone capability.



{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road fortoo long or too often while usingthe infotainment or navigationsystem could cause a crash.

You or others could be injured orkilled. Do not give extendedattention to these tasks whiledriving. Limit glances at thevehicle displays and focus yourattention on driving. Use voicecommands whenever possible.

See Defensive Driving on page 9-3

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-18

Customer Assistance

Assistance is available to help withBluetooth pairing, applicationdownloading and installation, othermobile device interface, andoperation support of theinfotainment system. Specialists areavailable when calling thisCustomer Assistance number:U.S. (855) 4 SUPPORT (478-7767).



Infotainment System OverviewThe infotainment system is controlled by using the buttons, touch screen,steering wheel controls, and voice recognition.

See Using the System on page 7-6.

1. SRCE (Source)

2. HOME

3. VOL/O (Volume/Power)

4. v /> (Phone/Mute)

5. FAV (Favorites)

6. © SEEK

7. Disc Slot (CD)

8. SEEK ¨9. NAV (Navigation)

10. BACK/

11. TUNE/MENU

12. DEST (Destination)

13. RPT (Repeat)

14. Z Eject

Infotainment Control Buttons

The buttons on the faceplate areused to start primary functions whileusing the infotainment system.



SRCE (Source): Press to changethe audio sources such as AM-FMRadio, SiriusXM® (if equipped),and AUX.

HOME: Press to go to the HomePage. See “Home Page” in thissection.

VOL/O (Volume/Power):

. Turn to adjust the volume.

. Press to turn the system onand off.

v /> (Phone/Mute):. Press to enter the phone main

screen.. Press and hold to mute or

unmute the infotainment system.See Bluetooth on page 7-75.

FAV (Favorites): Press to displaythe current favorite page numberabove the preset buttons. Keeppressing to scroll through thefavorites pages. The stored stationsfor each list display on the bottom ofthe screen. The number of presetFavorite Pages can be changed by

pressing the Config button on theHome Page, then pressing RadioSettings, and then pressing Numberof Favorite Pages.

© SEEK:. USB or Bluetooth Audio: Press

to seek to the beginning of thecurrent or previous track. If thetrack has been playing for lessthan five seconds, it seeks theprevious track. If longer thanfive seconds, the current trackstarts from the beginning.

. USB or Bluetooth Audio: Pressand hold to quickly reversethrough a track. Release thebutton to return to playingspeed. See USB on page 7-34.

. AM, FM, or SiriusXM (ifequipped): Press to seek to theprevious strong station.

¨ SEEK:. USB or Bluetooth Audio: Press

to seek the next track.

. USB or Bluetooth Audio: Pressand hold to fast forward througha track.

. AM, FM, or SiriusXM (ifequipped): Press to seek to thenext strong station.

NAV (Navigation):. Press to view the vehicle's

current position on the mapscreen.

. Continue pressing to cyclethrough the full map and splitscreens.

BACK/ : Press to return to theprevious screen in a menu.

TUNE/MENU:. Turn to manually tune to a radio

station.. Turn to highlight a feature. Press

to activate the highlightedfeature.

DEST (Destination):. Press to enter a destination.



. If a destination has already beenentered, press to access theDestination Menu. SeeDestination on page 7-48.

RPT (Repeat): Press to repeat thelast voice guidance prompt.

Touch Screen Buttons

Touch screen buttons are on thescreen and highlighted when afeature is available. Some togglescreen buttons highlight when activeand gray out when inactive.

Using the SystemThe infotainment system iscontrolled by touching the screen,and by using the knobs and otherbuttons.

Voice recognition, through thesteering wheel controls, can beused to control the infotainmentfeatures.

Press b / g on the steering wheelcontrols to begin voice recognition.See Voice Recognition onpage 7-68.

Home Page

Touch Screen Buttons

The Home Page allows access tomany of the features.

Back: Press to return to theprevious page.

Home: Press to go back to theHome Page.

Fav: Press to display a page ofstored favorite AM, FM,or SiriusXM® (if equipped) stations.Keep pressing Fav to scroll throughthe favorite pages.

More r : This button may displaydepending on the number of optionsstored on Home Page. Press to goto the next page.

q Previous: Press to go to theprevious page.

Nextr : Press to go to thenext page.

Home Page Customization

The first Home Page can becustomized.



To add screen buttons:

1. Press Menu.

2. Press Customize.

3. Press a screen button to add orremove from the first HomePage. A h indicates it will bedisplayed. The maximumnumber of buttons on HomePage 1 is eight.

4. Press Done.

To move screen buttons:

1. Press Sort.

2. Press an icon to move.

3. Press an icon to swap with.

4. Press Done.

To restore Home Page 1 defaults:

1. Press Menu.

2. Press Restore Home PageDefaults.

3. Press Yes or Cancel.

Home Page Features

Touch screen buttons arehighlighted when a feature isavailable.

Various functions are disabled whenthe vehicle is moving.

Press the Now Playing screenbutton to display the active sourcepage. The sources available areAM, FM, SiriusXM® (if equipped),USB/iPod, Pandora (if equipped),Stitcher, and AUX.

See AM-FM Radio on page 7-11,Satellite Radio on page 7-15,Pandora Internet Radio onpage 7-22, Stitcher Internet Radioon page 7-27, and Auxiliary Deviceson page 7-40.

Press the Navigation screen buttonto display a map of your currentvehicle position. See Using theNavigation System on page 7-42,Maps on page 7-46, NavigationSymbols on page 7-46, andConfigure Menu on page 7-60.

Press the Destination screen buttonto display the Destination Entryhome page or the Destination Menu.The available screen buttonsprovide easy access to a variety ofways to enter a destination. SeeDestination on page 7-48.



Press the Phone screen button todisplay the Phone main page. SeeBluetooth on page 7-75.

Press the Config screen button todisplay the Config main page. Fromthis display, adjust features such astime and date, radio, phone,navigation, vehicle, and display. SeeConfigure Menu on page 7-60.

Press the Tone screen button todisplay the Tone main page. Adjustthe tone and speakers by pressingthe screen buttons to change thelevels of sound for treble, midrange,bass, fade, and balance. SeeAM-FM Radio on page 7-11.

Press the Pictures screen button toview pictures on your USB drive orSD card. Pictures on the SD cardcan only be viewed through a USBadapter.

Press the FM screen button todisplay the FM main page and playthe current or last tuned FM station.See AM-FM Radio on page 7-11.

Press the AM screen button todisplay the AM main page and playthe current or last tuned AM station.See AM-FM Radio on page 7-11.



Press the XM screen button (ifequipped) to display the XM mainpage and play the current or lasttuned SiriusXM channel. SeeAM-FM Radio on page 7-11 andSatellite Radio on page 7-15.

Press the Pandora screen button (ifequipped) to display the Pandorahome page and streampersonalized radio stations basedon artists, songs, genres, andcomedians. See Pandora InternetRadio on page 7-22.

Press the Stitcher screen button (ifequipped) to display the Stitcherhome page and stream news,sports, and entertainment showsthrough the audio system. SeeStitcher Internet Radio onpage 7-27.

Press the E Bluetooth screen buttonto display the Bluetooth Audio mainpage to play music through aBluetooth device. See BluetoothAudio on page 7-41.

Press the iPod screen button todisplay the iPod main page and playthe current or last track selected.See Auxiliary Devices on page 7-40.

Press the USB screen button todisplay the USB main page and playthe current or last track selected.See Auxiliary Devices on page 7-40.

Press the AUX screen button toaccess any connected auxiliarydevice. See Auxiliary Devices onpage 7-40.



Press the Weather screen button (ifequipped) to display the weathermain page. Select otherweather-related options from thatlist. See “SiriusXM Travel LinkWeather” under Satellite Radio onpage 7-15.

Press the Fuel screen button (ifequipped) to display detailednationwide fuel price. See “SiriusXMTravel Link Fuel Prices” underSatellite Radio on page 7-15

Press the Movies screen button (ifequipped) to show detailed localmovie theater listings, start times,and ratings if available. See“SiriusXM Travel Link MovieListings” in Satellite Radio onpage 7-15.

Press the Quick Info screen buttonto access information on Audioplaying. See Quick Info onpage 7-22.

Press the Messages screen button(if equipped) to display the TextMessage Inbox. See TextMessaging on page 7-82.

If equipped, this feature is availablethrough the Apps button on theradio Home Page. Downloading andusing Apps requires a Wi-Fi Internetconnection as part of a smartphoneor other mobile device data serviceplan. On most smartphones,activation is in the Settings menuunder Mobile Network Sharing,Personal Hotspot, Mobile Hotspot,Wi-Fi Hotspot, or similar. After



activation of Wi-Fi on thesmartphone, press the Apps buttonon the radio Home Page. Follow theprompts to configure the Internetconnection and set up an account.See www.chevrolet.com/mylink(U.S.) or www.mylink.chevrolet.ca(Canada).

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

For vehicles with high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays, use amicrofiber cloth to wipe surfaces.Before wiping the surface with themicrofiber cloth, use a soft bristlebrush to remove dirt that couldscratch the surface. Then use themicrofiber cloth by gently rubbing toclean. Never use window cleanersor solvents. Periodically hand washthe microfiber cloth separately,using mild soap. Do not use bleachor fabric softener. Rinse thoroughlyand air dry before next use.

{ Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and wouldnot be covered by the warranty.

Software UpdatesSee the websites for moreinformation.

Website Information

In the U.S., see www.chevrolet.com

In Canada, seewww.chevrolet.gm.ca

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Playing the Radio

VOL/O (Volume/Power):

. Press to turn the radio on or off.

. Turn to increase or decrease thevolume of the active source.

The steering wheel controls canalso be used to adjust the volume.See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2.

Radio Operation

The radio will work when the key isin ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. When the key isturned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,the radio will continue to work for10 minutes or until the driver door isopened.

The radio can be turned on bypressing the power button on theradio and will stay on for



10 minutes. Opening the driver doorwill not turn the radio off whenpressing the power button.

Some radios may stay on longerand reset the time for 10 minutes ifthere are any additional presses ofany radio button.

The radio can be turned off at anytime by pressing the power button.

Audio Source

Press SRCE or SRC on the steeringwheel controls to display and scrollthrough the available sources AM,FM, XM (if equipped), Pandora (ifequipped), Stitcher, USB, AUX, andBluetooth Audio.

Infotainment System Settings

Tone Settings

To access the tone settings, pressthe Tone Settings button on theHome Page. Tone settings arespecific to each source.

To adjust the settings:. Bass: Press + or − to change

the level.. Mid (Midrange): Press + or − to

change the level.. Treble: Press + or − to change

the level.. EQ: Press or turn the TUNE/

MENU knob to cycle through thepreset EQ options.

. Fade: Press the F or R buttonfor more sound from the front orrear speakers. The middleposition balances the soundbetween the front and rearspeakers.

. Balance: Press the L or R buttonfor more sound from the left orright speakers. The middleposition balances the soundbetween the left and rightspeakers.

Finding a Station

Press SRCE or SRC on the steeringwheel controls to select AM, FM,XM, Pandora (if equipped), Stitcher,USB, AUX, and Bluetooth Audio.

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to finda radio station. To select a presetstation, press FAV to scroll throughthe favorite pages and then press apreset button on the radio or thescreen button.

Seeking a Station

Press © SEEK or SEEK ¨ to searchfor a station.



AM

1. Press the AM screen button onthe Home Page or select AM bypressing SRCE or SRC on thesteering wheel controls, or say“Tune AM” or “AM” through voicerecognition.

2. Press the Menu screen button todisplay the AM stations orcategories.

3. Press to select an option. Toupdate the station list, pressRefresh.

FM

1. Press the FM screen button onthe Home Page or select FM bypressing SRCE or SRC on thesteering wheel controls, or say“Tune FM” or “FM” through voicerecognition.

2. Press the Menu screen button todisplay the FM stations orcategories.

3. Press to select an option. Toupdate the station list, pressRefresh.

XM (If Equipped)

1. Press the XM screen button onthe Home Page or select XM bypressing SRCE or SRC on thesteering wheel controls, or say“Tune XM” or “XM” through voicerecognition.

2. Press the Menu screen button todisplay the SiriusXM categories.

3. Press a category and then turnthe TUNE/MENU knob to scrollthe station list. Press to selectan option.



Storing Radio Station Presets

Up to 36 preset stations can bestored. AM, FM, and XM can bemixed.

1. From the AM, FM, or XM mainpage, press and hold any of the1–6 buttons or one of the presetscreen buttons at the bottom ofthe screen. After a few seconds,a beep is heard and the newpreset information displays onthat screen button.

2. Repeat for each preset.

Mixed-Band Presets

Each favorite page can storesix preset stations. The presetswithin a page can be different radiobands.

To scroll through the pages, pressthe Fav screen button on the topbar. The current page numberdisplays above the preset buttons.The stored stations for each favoritepage display on the preset buttons.

To change the number of favoritepages displayed:

1. Press Config on theHome Page.

2. Press Radio Settings.

3. Press Number of FavoritePages.

Recalling a Preset Station

To recall a preset station from afavorites page, do one of thefollowing:. Press the Fav screen button at

the top bar to display the presetpop-up. Press one of the presetscreen buttons to go to theselected preset station.

. In the AM, FM, or XM mainpage, press one of the presetscreen buttons to go to theselected preset station.

Radio Data System (RDS)RDS features are available for useonly on FM stations that broadcastRDS information. With RDS, theradio can:. Seek to stations broadcasting

the selected type ofprogramming.

. Receive announcementsconcerning local and nationalemergencies.

. Display messages from radiostations.

This system relies on receivingspecific information from thesestations and only works when theinformation is available. It ispossible that a radio station couldbroadcast incorrect information thatcauses the radio features to workimproperly. If this happens, contactthe radio station.

When information is broadcast fromthe current FM station, the stationname or call letters display on theaudio screen. RDS can provide a



program type (PTY) for currentprogramming and the name of theprogram being broadcasted.

Satellite Radio

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio

Vehicles with a valid SiriusXMsatellite radio subscription canreceive SiriusXM programming.

SiriusXM satellite radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.See www.siriusxm.com or call1-866-635-2349 (U.S.) andwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

When SiriusXM is active, thechannel name, number, categoryname, song title, and artist displayon the screen. SiriusXM may updatethe background picture at any time.

Press the XM icon on the HomePage to access the XMAudio Menu.

TuneSelect

An alert will be sent when the radiosees that search criteria on any XMchannel is met and offer the optionto tune to that song or artist. Up to10 artists and songs can be savedin the TuneSelect list.

To store an Artist or Song:

1. Press Menu when the Artist orSong is on XM.

2. Select TuneSelect to access theTuneSelect Menu.

3. Select Save Alert for ArtistPlaying or Save Alert for SongPlaying.

4. Press OK to confirm.

To turn TuneSelect on or off:

1. Press Menu when in XM.

2. Select TuneSelect.

3. Select Alerts Active to turn thealerts on or off.



To delete TuneSelect Alerts:

1. Press Menu when in XM.

2. Press Manage TuneSelect.

3. Press Delete Alerts.

4. Select the alert to delete.

5. Press OK to confirm.

SiriusXM Categories

SiriusXM channels are organized incategories.

Adding or Removing XMCategories

To customize which SiriusXMcategories are used and displayedin the system:

1. Press CONFIG on the faceplateor the Config screen button onthe Home Page.

2. Select Radio Settings from theSettings Menu list.

3. Select XM Categories.

4. Select or deselect any categoryto be used in XM mode.A checkmark will indicate thatthe category is selected.

Press Show All XM Categories torestore all SiriusXM categories.

SiriusXM Channel Graphics

SiriusXM provides updated categorybackground graphics and the radiowill automatically update the screen.SiriusXM may send updatedcategory graphics to the vehicle.When this happens, the backgroundgraphics may appear to be incorrect

but the radio will update once all ofthe graphics have been downloadedfrom SiriusXM.

To turn SiriusXM channel graphicson or off:

1. Press HOME on the faceplate.

2. Select XM.

3. Press Menu on the XM NowPlaying Screen.

4. Press the XM Channel Art toturn on or off.

NavTraffic® (If Equipped)

The navigation system might have aSiriusXM NavTraffic receiver. It is asubscription service providedthrough SiriusXM Satellite Radio.A service fee is required to receivethe SiriusXM NavTraffic service.Real-time traffic information isprovided to fully integrate thenavigation system to display currenttraffic conditions for the chosenroute. See “Traffic Settings” in thissection for more information.



A screen displays to indicate thatthe SiriusXM NavTraffic subscriptionis not activated.

If activated, traffic informationdisplays:. Unscheduled traffic incident

data, such as accidents anddisabled vehicles.

. Scheduled traffic incident data,such as road construction androad closures.

. Traffic flow information (rate ofspeed data). Flow data might notbe available in all markets.

Traffic information is delivered to thevehicle by the SiriusXM Radiosatellites. SiriusXM NavTrafficprovides continuously updatedtraffic information.

SiriusXM NavTraffic currentlybroadcasts the traffic information formany markets nationally. Theservice may be available in morecities in the future. Visitwww.xmnavtraffic.com for moredetails on local coverage.

To access the traffic features, pressthe Traffic button from theNavigation Menu or map screen.

All Traffic Events: Press to view alist of reported traffic conditions forup to approximately 100 km (70 mi).It could take some time to displaythe information received.

The information is displayed with anarrow and distance. The arrowindicates the distance in a straightline and the direction of the eventfrom the vehicle's current position.

Traffic Events on Route: Press todisplay a list of reported trafficconditions on the current route. Thebutton is toned down if no route isactive.

Traffic Settings: Press tocustomize traffic options.

SiriusXM Travel Link (IfEquipped)

The infotainment system may haveSiriusXM® Travel Link. It is asubscription service providedthrough SiriusXM Satellite Radio.A service fee is required to receivethe SiriusXM Travel Link service.When subscribed to SiriusXM TravelLink, one or more services may beavailable.. Travel Link Fuel Prices: Detailed

nation wide fuel price informationmay be available.

. Travel Link Movie Listings:Detailed local movie theaterlistings, start times, and ratingsmay be available.



. Travel Link Weather: Nationaland Local Weather gives currentand forecasted weather.

For more detailed information andcoverage details on SiriusXM TravelLink go to www.siriusxm.com.

SiriusXM Travel Link Fuel Prices

When SiriusXM Travel Linkinformation is available, the systemwill display a list of fuel stationsclose to the vehicle location. The listwill include fuel station name,direction, distance and price. Thelist can be sorted by distance orprice and there are four differentfuel types to choose from. As thevehicle is moving, a direction arrowand distance to fuel station willupdate. The arrow represents thedirection to the gas station from thecurrent vehicle position. Thedistance represents the straight linedistance between the vehiclelocation and the fuel station.

From the Home Page, press theFuel button.

To change the fuel information onthe screen press the Fuel MenuButton to:. Sort Fuel Stations By Price or By

Distance: The default sortmethod is by distance.

. Choose Fuel Type: Theavailable fuel types are Regular(unleaded), Mid-Range,Premium, and Diesel.

For more information on the fuelstation, select the fuel station name.The screen will show the fuel stationname, address, phone number,distance, amenities, and the lasttime the fuel price was updated. If afuel station does not appear in thelist, it may be new or the price maynot have been updated in the past24 hours.

If equipped with Navigation whenthe fuel station is selected, seeDestination on page 7-48 for moreinformation of navigation routingfeatures.

Allow up to five minutes after turningon the vehicle for the fuelinformation to appear.

SiriusXM Travel Link MovieListings

When SiriusXM Travel Linkinformation is available the moviefeature provides movie showtimesand theater information for moviesclose to the vehicle location. TheMovie feature provides detailedtheater and movie informationincluding showtimes.

From the Home Page, press theSiriusXM® Movie button. Thesystem displays the Movie andTheater search page.

To search movies:. Select the Movie field to choose

a movie name.. Select the Theater field to

choose a specific theater.. Select the Date field to choose

which date to search moviesand/or theaters.



. Press the Search button to viewa list of movies or theaters.

When searching by movie, a list willdisplay movies to select. When amovie is selected, a theater list willappear with a direction arrow anddistance from the current vehiclelocation. The direction and distancewill update every 10 seconds as thevehicle is moving. The directionarrow represents the location of thetheater from the current vehiclelocation. The distance representsthe straight line distance betweenthe vehicle location and the theater.

Movie details are available when amovie is selected. The detailsinclude Cast, Synopsis, and TheaterInformation. Select the appropriatebutton to display more information.

Cast and Synopsis:. Playtime. Rating (G, PG-13, R, etc.). Theater Name. Showtimes

Theater information includesaddress, phone number, distance,and amenities.

SiriusXM Travel Link Weather

Whether near home or on a longroad trip, detailed weatherinformation is available. SiriusXMTravel Link Weather uses the samesources that professional pilots andmariners rely on.

From the Home Page, press theWeather screen button. The systemdisplays the XM Weather Menu.Some options may only be presenton vehicles equipped withnavigation.

3 Hour/6 Hour Forecast

The 3 Hour/6 Hour Forecast pageshows the current weather conditionin the city of the vehicle's currentposition.

Allow up to 15 minutes for thecurrent weather in the area todisplay.

5 Day Forecast

Press to show the extended 5 Dayforecast.

Forecast Along the Route

If a destination is set, weatherconditions can be viewed for up tothree locations along the route:. Current vehicle position.. Midway point from current

position to final destination.. Current weather condition of the

destination city.



Nearby Ski Conditions

Select this option to view skiconditions surrounding or nearbythe vehicle’s current location.

Location

Select this option to view weatherconditions around or in a specificcity entered by name or selectedfrom the map.

The options available are:. Around Current Position. Around Destination. Select Weather Station

Current Weather Advisories

From the XM Weather Menu, pressthe Current Weather Advisoriesscreen button to display any currentweather advisory warnings in effectnear the current position.

Troubleshooting

XM Travel Link services use theSiriusXM® Satellite Signal and GPSSatellite Signal to provide thisfeature.

When the vehicle is started, it cantake up to five minutes for the radioto receive the Travel Link services.

Travel Link Messages

No GPS signal: Move the vehicleinto a position that is visible tothe sky.

Acquiring Signal: Radio isdownloading the activationinformation or not receiving a goodsignal. Move the vehicle to open skyand restart the vehicle.

No XM Signal: Reception isblocked. Move the vehicle intoopen sky.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference, and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.



AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. Static can occur whenthings like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. Whenthis happens, try reducing the trebleon the radio.

SiriusXM Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Servicegives digital radio reception fromcoast to coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Justas with FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the SiriusXM signal for a periodof time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage can causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.

Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integratedwith the rear window defogger in therear window. Do not scratch theinside surface or damage the linesin the glass. If the inside surface isdamaged, it could interfere withradio reception. For proper radioreception, the antenna connectorneeds to be properly attached to thepost on the glass.

If attaching a cell phone antenna tothe glass, attach it between the gridlines.

{ Caution

Using a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rearwindow can damage the rearwindow antenna and/or the rear

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

window defogger. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.

{ Caution

Do not apply aftermarket glasstinting with metallic film. Themetallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with ordistort the incoming radioreception. Any damage caused tothe backglass antenna due tometallic tinting materials will notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Multi-Band AntennaThe roof antenna is for SiriusXMSatellite Radio Service,OnStar® (ifequipped), and GPS (GlobalPositioning System). Keep clear of



obstructions for clear reception.If the vehicle has a sunroof, and it isopen, reception can also beaffected.

Quick Info

Quick Info gives access to quickinformation on Audio playing,OnStar Turn-by-Turn route (ifequipped), 5-day forecast, NearbyFuel Stations, and Movie ShowTimes.

To access, press Quick Info on theHome Page or the INFO button onthe faceplate. Depending on thesystem and if the options areavailable for that region, someoptions may be grayed out.

Audio Info: Displays informationon the current item playing.

OnStar Turn by Turn: Displaysthe next maneuver in a route. SeeOnStar® Destination Download onpage 7-59.

5-day Forecast: Displays the5-day forecast for the weatherstation closest to the currentlocation. See “SiriusXM Travel LinkWeather” in Satellite Radio onpage 7-15.

Nearby Fuel Stations: Displaysfuel prices and distances for closefuel stations. See “SiriusXM TravelLink Fuel Prices” under “SiriusXMTravel Link (If Available)” in SatelliteRadio on page 7-15.

Movie Showtimes: Displays a listof movies playing in the theatersclosest to the current location. See“SiriusXM Travel Link MovieListings” under “SiriusXM TravelLink (If Available)” in Satellite Radioon page 7-15.

Pandora Internet RadioPandora (if equipped) is a freeInternet radio service that streamspersonalized radio stations basedon artists, songs, genres, andcomedians. Create stations usingthe Pandora website or smartphoneapplication, then use - (thumbs up)

or , (thumbs down) to personalizestations. To set up an account, or formore information, go towww.pandora.com.

A phone or tablet with Internetconnection and the Pandoraapplication installed is required.Personal cell phone data plans areused. Make sure the latest versionis installed on the device and thevolume is turned up.

To install Pandora:. On an Android™ phone or

Android Tablet, go to the AndroidPlay Store, and search forPandora. Install to the phone,not to the SD card.



. On a BlackBerry® phone, go tothe BlackBerry App World™ andsearch for Pandora.

. On an iPhone®, iPad®, or iPodtouch®, go to the iTunes® Storeand search for Pandora.

Launching Pandora

Connect the iPhone, iPad, or iPodtouch to the USB port, or connectan Android or BlackBerry throughBluetooth. See Auxiliary Devices onpage 7-40 or Bluetooth onpage 7-75. For first-time use, set upstations before connecting to thevehicle. The Pandora icon will beavailable on the Home Page andthe source pop-up displays if thelatest application is installed on thedevice.

Using the iPhone, iPod Touch,or iPad

1. Plug the device into the USBport. The phone screen must beunlocked.

2. To launch, do one of thefollowing:. Launch the application on

the device.. Press Pandora on the

Home Page.

. Press b / g and say“Pandora” or “TunePandora.”

. Accept any notification onthe screen of the device.

To relaunch Pandora, press SRCEor SRC on the steering wheelcontrols.

If nothing happens when theavailable Pandora screen button ispressed, download the latestPandora application and retry.

Pandora will always be highlightedon the Home Page when an iPhone,iPad, or iPod touch is connectedusing the USB port. To use, log intoyour account.

If the “Please See Device” messageis shown, the login screen maydisplay on the device.

If the “Please Unlock the Phone orRestart the App and Try Again”message is shown, then the phonemay be locked. Unlock the phone,close the app, then restart the appand make sure the Home Page isvisible on the phone/device.

If the vehicle is shut off while tunedto Pandora and the iPhone, iPad,or iPod touch is left connected tothe USB port before the next ignitioncycle, the radio will start playingPandora when the vehicle is started.

If Pandora is shut down on thephone or another audio app is used,Pandora may not start on the nextignition cycle. If iPod source isselected, it may show iPod and thenswitch to Pandora.

Using an Android Phone

1. Pair the Android phone usingBluetooth.



2. Use one of the following tolaunch:. Launch the application on


Home Page.


After Pandora has been launched,press SRCE or SRC on the steeringwheel controls to access Pandorafeatures.



If the "Please unlock your phone orrestart the app" message is shown,then the phone may be locked.

Unlock the phone, close the app,then restart the app to ensureproper communication.

Using a BlackBerry Phone

The phone must be unlocked. Tolaunch Pandora service:

1. Pair the BlackBerry phone usingBluetooth.

2. Use one of the following tolaunch:. Launch the application on


Home Page.


After Pandora has been launched,press SRCE or SRC on the steeringwheel controls to access Pandorafeatures.



If the "Please unlock your phone orrestart the app" message is shown,then the phone may be locked.Unlock the phone, close the app,and then restart the app to ensureproper communication.

Pandora Menus

Press Menu on the Pandoramain page.



Pandora has a menu system withthe following:

Shuffle: Press to play the stationsin random order.

User-Created Stations: Press toplay a user-created station.

Pandora Features

Pandora has features to rate tracks,skip tracks, or change stations.

} (Bookmarks): Press whileplaying a track to bookmark eitherthe track or the artist. Bookmarksare viewable on www.pandora.com.

, (Thumbs Down): Whenpressed, Pandora stores theinformation, changes to the nexttrack, and does not play the track onthis station again. This helpsPandora choose which tracksshould not play on this station. Thisfeature is only available onuser-created stations.

- (Thumbs Up): When pressed,Pandora stores this information and- is highlighted for the remainder ofthe track. This helps Pandorachoose which tracks should play onthis station.

l (Next Track): When pressed,Pandora changes to the next track.

J (Play/Pause): Press on theradio to pause playback. Pressagain to resume.

Tuning Pandora Stations: WhenPandora is playing, use the b / gbutton on the steering wheel to tuneto any Pandora Station on thedevice.

1. Press the b / g button on thesteering wheel.

2. Say “Tune Pandora <ClassicRock> Radio.”

Pandora voice control will not workuntil Pandora is launched the firsttime during that ignition cycle.

Pandora Skip Limit

Pandora limits the number of skipsallowed on their service. When theskip limit is reached, , will not skip

the currently playing track, but ,feedback will be recorded.

Pandora Advertisement

Pandora may displayadvertisements. Artist name andtrack title will not be displayed andthe skip track button is notavailable.

Switching Between Pandora andStitcher

To switch between Pandora andStitcher, press the application iconon the iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad.



This is not required for Androiddevices. See Stitcher Internet Radioon page 7-27.

Pandora Troubleshooting

Unable to Connect Device toVehicle

If the device is unable to connect tothe USB or Bluetooth:


2. Remove the key from theignition.

3. Open and close the driver door,wait about 30 seconds, and tryto connect the device again.

Unable to Start Pandora

If the device is unable to launchPandora:. Check that the latest version of

Pandora is installed.. Check that there is an active

account logged into Pandora.. Have at least one station

created.

. For Android and BlackBerrydevices, check that the device ispaired with the vehicle, and theBluetooth icon on the display ishighlighted.

. For iPhone, iPod touch, or iPaddevices, check that the USBcable is connected to the USBport and the screen is unlocked.

. Close Pandora on the deviceand launch again. Devices thatallow multitasking may requirean extra step to quit the Pandoraapplication. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide.

Thumbs Up or Thumbs DownError

If there is an error trying to rate atrack with the , or - buttons, anerror message will display. PressOK to retry.

Loss of Audio

Loss of Pandora audio can happenin different ways:. Weak or lost data connection.

. Device needs to be charged.

. Application needs to berelaunched.

. Connection between phone andradio lost.

. If any iPhone, iPod touch,or iPad is connected toBluetooth and the dockconnector, go to the Airplay iconon the device and select dockconnector or disconnect andreconnect the dock connector onthe device.

. The volume is too low. Turn upthe volume on the device.

. The battery saver and taskmanager applications on thephone can cause Pandora tofunction incorrectly. Removethose apps from the phone orremove Pandora and Bluetoothfrom the task lists.



If the connection is lost between theapplication and device, a message“Please unlock your phone or restartthe phone app and try again” willdisplay. Press OK to retry.

If pressing OK does not clear theissue on the phone, see “PleaseUnlock Your Phone or RestartPhone App and Try Again” under"Common Pandora Messages"following.

Common Pandora Messages

Please See Device: When notlogged in or when authenticationfailed, see the device. Press OK tocontinue.

Paused or Audio Paused:Playback is paused on the radio orthe device. Press J or play on thedevice.

No Stations Found: Logged in butno stations have been created.Press OK to continue.

Please Unlock Your Phone orRestart Phone App and TryAgain: Communication failurebetween the radio and the phoneapplication, or the device is locked.

Devices that allow multitasking mayrequire an extra step to quit thePandora application. Close Pandoraon the device and launch again.

Unlock the phone and check thatHome Page is displayed on thephone/device.

See the cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

See www.pandora.com/help formore information. If the service willnot work, see your dealer forassistance.

Stitcher Internet RadioStitcher SmartRadio™ is an Internetradio service that streams news,sports, and entertainment showsthrough the audio system. Createpersonalized, on-demand stations ordiscover new shows through

Stitcher's preset stations. To set upan account, download theapplication from the Android Marketor iTunes Store, or go towww.stitcher.com.

A phone or tablet with Internetconnection is required for thisapplication. Personal cell phonedata plans are used. Make sure thelatest version is installed on thedevice and the volume on thedevice is turned up.

BlackBerry phones are notsupported for this application.

To install Stitcher:. On an Android phone or Tablet

with Internet connection, go tothe Android Play Store, searchfor Stitcher, and install to thephone, not to the SD card.

. On an iPhone, iPad, or iPodtouch, go to the iTunes Storeand search for Stitcher.



Launching Stitcher

Connect the iPhone, iPad, or iPodtouch to the USB port, or connectAndroid through Bluetooth. SeeAuxiliary Devices on page 7-40 orBluetooth on page 7-75. Forfirst-time use, set up the stationsbefore connecting to the vehicle.The Stitcher icon will be availableon the Home Page and sourcepop-up displays if the latestapplication is installed on thedevice.

Using the iPhone, iPod Touch,or iPad

1. Plug the device into the USBport. The phone screen must beunlocked.

2. Use one of the following tolaunch:. Press the application on the

device.. Press Stitcher on the

Home Page.

. Press b / g and say“Stitcher” or “Tune Stitcher.”

. Accept any notification onthe screen of the device.

3. If Stitcher does not beginplaying, select a category andthen a station.

After Stitcher has been launched,press SRCE or SRC on the steeringwheel controls to access Stitcherfeatures.

If nothing happens when theavailable Stitcher screen button ispressed, download the latestStitcher application and retry.

Stitcher will always be highlightedon the Home Page when an iPhone,iPad, or iPod touch is connectedusing the USB port. To use, log intoyour account.


If the "Please unlock your phone orrestart the app" message is shown,then the phone may be locked.

Unlock the phone, close the app,then restart the app to make surethe Home Page is visible on thephone/device.

Using an Android Phone

1. Pair the Android phone usingBluetooth.

2. Use one of the following tolaunch:. Press the application on the

device.. Press Stitcher on the

Home Page.

. Press b / g and say“Stitcher” or “Tune Stitcher.”

3. If Stitcher does not beginplaying, select a category andthen a station.

After Stitcher has been launched,press SRCE or SRC on the steeringwheel controls to access Stitcherfeatures.



If nothing happens when theavailable Stitcher screen button ispressed, download the latestStitcher application and retry.


If the “Please unlock your phone orrestart the app” message is shown,then the phone may be locked.Unlock the phone, close the app,then restart the app to ensureproper communication.

Stitcher Menus

Press Menu on the Stitchermain page.

Stitcher has a menu system with thefollowing:

My On Demand Stations: Displaysa list of favorite stations and shows.

Select and store programs asfavorites on the device. Favoritestation lists can be created toinclude favorite shows which can beaccessed through My On DemandStations.

Stitcher Station Categories:Displays categories by topic.

When a category then sub-categoryis selected, the radio will startplaying the first program in thatsub-category.

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob todisplay the first 24 stations of thatsub-category.

Current Station Playlist: Whilelistening to a show, turn the TUNE/Menu knob to display the menu listof shows available for the currentstation.

Stitcher Features

Stitcher service has features to rateor skip shows, or change stations.

q (Favorites): When pressed, thecurrent show is added to thefavorites station.

, (Thumbs Down): Whenpressed, Stitcher changes to thenext show. This helps Stitcherprovide a personalized listeningexperience.

- (Thumbs Up): When pressed,Stitcher stores this information and- is highlighted for the remainder of



the show. This helps Stitcherprovide a personalized listeningexperience.

l (Next Show): When pressed,Stitcher changes to the next show.

J (Play/Pause): Press on theradio to pause playback. Pressagain to resume.

Stitcher Advertisement

Stitcher may displayadvertisements. Artist name and titlemay not display and the skip trackbutton is not available.

Stitcher Troubleshooting

Unable to Connect Device toVehicle

If the device is unable to connect tothe USB or Bluetooth:


2. Remove the key from theignition.

3. Open and close the driver door,wait about 30 seconds, and tryto connect the device again.

The battery saver and task managerapplications on the phone cancause Stitcher to functionincorrectly. Remove those appsfrom the phone or remove Stitcherand Bluetooth from the task lists.

Unable to Start Stitcher

If the device is unable to launchStitcher:. Check that the latest version of

Stitcher is installed.. Check that there is an active

account logged into Stitcher.. For Android devices, check that

the device is paired with thevehicle, and the Bluetooth iconon the display is highlighted.

. For iPhone, iPod touch, or iPaddevices, check that the USBcable is connected to the USBport and the screen is unlockedand the Home Page is showing.

. Close Stitcher on the device andlaunch again. Devices that allowmultitasking may require an

extra step to quit the Stitcherapplication. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide.

Loss of Audio

Loss of Stitcher audio can happendue to:. Weak or lost data connection.. Device needs to be charged.. Application needs to be

relaunched.. Connection between phone and

radio is lost.. If any iPhone, iPod touch,

or iPad is connected toBluetooth and the dockconnector, go to the Airplay iconon the device and select dockconnector or disconnect andreconnect the dock connector onthe device.

. The volume is too low. Turn upthe volume on the device.



If the connection is lost between theapplication and device, a message“Please unlock your phone or restartthe phone app and try again” willdisplay. Press OK to retry.

If pressing OK does not clear theissue, see “Please Unlock YourPhone or Restart Phone App andTry Again” under “Common StitcherMessages” following.

Common Stitcher Messages

Please Try Again Later: A generalerror has occurred. A dataconnection may be unavailable dueto a weak or lost signal or theStitcher service being temporarilydown. Press OK to continue.

Paused or Audio Paused:Playback is paused on the radio orthe device. Press J or play on thedevice.

Please See Device: When the useris not logged in or whenauthentication failed, see thedevice. Press OK to continue.

Disconnect the phone from the radioand follow the Stitcher account loginprocess on the phone.

No Stations Found: Logged in butno stations have been created.Press OK to continue.

Please Choose a New Station:The end of the station has beenreached and there is no morecontent to play. Select a new stationthrough the Stitcher menu.

Please Unlock Your Phone orRestart Phone App and TryAgain: Communication failurebetween the radio and the phoneapplication or the device is locked.

See www.stitcher.com/help for moreinformation. If the service will notwork, send an e-mail [email protected] or see yourdealer for assistance.

PicturesPictures can only be viewed usingUSB devices. If pictures are on anSD card, transfer to a USB device

or use a USB-SD adapter.A maximum 5Mb uncompressedphoto size is supported, however toachieve this, use a 4 Megapixel orlower resolution camera setting.Only jpeg, bmp, gif, and png filesare supported.

1. Press the Pictures screen buttonon the Home Page.

2. The system does a search tofind the picture folders.A “Please wait” messagedisplays until the search isfinished.

3. A list displays. Select a pictureto view.



4. Once a picture displays, thefollowing options are available:

Info: Press to turn file nameinformation on or off.

S : Press to display a previouspicture if not in slide show mode.

r : Press to toggle between slideshow mode and manual mode.

T : Press to display a next pictureif not in slide show mode.

E : Press to manually turn apicture 90 degreescounterclockwise.

Menu: Press to open the PictureViewer Settings screen. SlidePicture Viewer Main, SlideshowTimer, and Shuffle Images displayas options for configuring the viewof images stored in the system.

If the displayed picture screen is notused within six seconds, the upperand lower bar options will disappear.Touch-tap the screen to re-displaythe upper and lower bar.

Audio Players

CD PlayerThe CD player is capable of playing:. Most audio CDs. CD-R. CD-RW. MP3, unprotected WMA, and

AAC formats

When playing any compatiblerecordable disc, the sound qualitymay be reduced due to the disc, themethod of recording, the quality ofthe music recorded, or how the dischas been handled.

There may be increased skipping,difficulty reading recorded tracks,finding tracks, and/or loading andejecting. If these problems occur,check the disc for damage or try aknown good disc.

To avoid damage to the CD player:. Do not use scratched or

damaged discs.



. Do not apply labels to discs. Thelabels could get caught in theplayer.

. Insert only one disc at a time.

. Keep the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

. Use a marking pen to label thetop of the disc.

Loading and Ejecting Discs

To load a disc:

1. Turn the infotainment system on.

2. Insert a disc into the slot, rightside up. The player pulls it in therest of the way. If the disc isdamaged or improperly loaded,there is an error and the discejects.

The disc automatically plays onceloaded.

PressZ to eject a disc from theCD player. If the disc is not removedwithin a short period of time, it isautomatically pulled back into theplayer.

Playing an Audio CD

1. Press the CD screen button onthe Home Page or select CDfrom the source pop-up todisplay the CD main page.

2. Press the Menu screen button todisplay the menu options.

3. Press to select the option.

On the CD main page, the tracknumber displays and the Song,Artist, and Album informationdisplays when available.

Use the following radio controls toplay the disc:

J (Play/Pause): Use to pause orresume play.

This is not available on vehicleswith Navigation.

© SEEK:. Press to seek to the beginning of

the current or previous track.If the track has been playing forfewer than five seconds, it seeksto the previous track. If longerthan five seconds, the currenttrack starts from the beginning.

. Press and hold to fast reversethrough a track. Release thebutton to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.

¨ SEEK:. Press to seek to the next track.



. Press and hold to fast forwardthrough a track. Release thebutton to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.

TUNE/MENU Knob: Turn to theright or left to select the next orprevious track. Press the knob toselect from the list. If a track isselected from the menu, the systemplays the track and returns to theCD screen.

Error Messages

If Disc Error displays and/or the disccomes out, it could be due to:. The disc has an invalid or

unknown format.. The disc is very hot. Try the disc

again when the temperaturereturns to normal.

. The road is very rough. Try thedisc again when the road issmoother.

. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. Try thedisc again later.

. There was a problem whileburning the disc.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.

If the CD is not playing correctly, trya known good CD.

If any error continues, contact yourdealer.

USB

Playing from a USB

A USB mass storage or CertifiedWindows Vista®/Media TransferProtocol (MTP) device can beconnected to the USB port.

The USB port is in the centerconsole under the armrest.

The USB icon displays when theUSB device is connected.

USB Media Formats

The USB port will support thefollowing media formats:. MP3. Unprotected WMA. Unprotected AAC

Other formats may be supported.

Gracenote®

Gracenote technology embeddedinto the radio helps manage andnavigate the USB device musiccollection. When a USB device isconnected to the radio, Gracenoteidentifies the music collection anddelivers the correct album, artistname, genres, and cover art on thescreen. If information is missing,Gracenote will fill it in.

Searching Music Library UsingVoice Recognition

Voice Recognition: Gracenoteimproves music search andnavigation by identifying bands,artists, and albums names that may



be hard to pronounce, irregularspellings, and nicknames. Forexample, Gracenote helps thesystem understand artist names like“INXS” or “Mötley Crüe.” It alsoallows the use of names like: “TheBoss,” “G.N.R,” “The Fab Four,” andthousands of other famous artistnicknames as voice commands toaccess music. See VoiceRecognition on page 7-68.

Normalization: Normalization helpsto improve the voice recognitionaccuracy for titles that sound similar.It also helps group long lists ofgenres into 10 common genres. Forexample, there may be multiple rockgenres in the media library;normalization will group all thoseinto one rock genre. Normalizationdefault is off.

To turn Normalization on:

1. Press CONFIG or Config on theHome Page.

2. Press Radio Settings, then pressGracenote Options.

3. Press Normalization to turn onor off.

Cover Art: The Gracenoteembedded database contains coverart or album art information for themusic on the USB device. If themusic is recognized by Gracenoteand does have cover art, Gracenotewill use the cover art found in theembedded database and display iton the radio. User predefined coverart will always be used first. If no

cover art is found Gracenote willuse generic Genre graphics orimages of artists.

More Like This

The Gracenote database containsattributes for Music, such as genre,era of music, region, artist type,mood, etc. Use this to create aplaylist of up to 30 songs "more like"currently listened to song. Thisplaylist will be stored in the PlaylistMenu when the device isreconnected. If songs are removedfrom the device, the system willsimply skip over those songs andplay the next available song.

Use the touch screen or voicerecognition to create a More LikeThis Playlist. See “VoiceRecognition Commands” in VoiceRecognition on page 7-68.

Gracenote Indexing

While Gracenote is indexing,infotainment features are availableincluding selecting music from themenu. Voice recognition music will



not be available until the radio hascompleted indexing the device.Devices with more music may takelonger to index. The device willindex when plugged into the radiofor the first time. When Indexing isremoved from the screen, the radiois ready to support music search.On the next connection or ignitioncycle, Indexing will show briefly onthe screen. The radio is searchingfor changes to the device andpreparing the music list. If there areno changes, the voice recognitionmusic search will be available. Theradio will index and store twodevices with up to 10,000 songs oneach device.

USB MP3 Player and USB Drives. The USB MP3 players and USB

drives connected must complywith the USB Mass StorageClass specification (USB MSC).

. Hard disk drives are notsupported.

. The radio will not be able to playback write-protected music.

. File system supported: FAT32.

. The following restrictions applyfor the data stored on a USBMP3 player or USB device:

‐ Maximum folder structuredepth: eight levels.

‐ Maximum number of MP3/WMA files that can bedisplayed: 10,000.

‐ Playlist entries must be in theform of relative paths.

‐ The system attribute forfolders/files that contain audiodata must not be set.

To play a USB device, do one of thefollowing:. Connect the USB and it begins

to play.. Press the Now Playing screen

button on the Home Page.. Press SRCE to scroll until the

USB source screen is available.

. Press b / g on the steeringwheel controls to select songsby Artist, Album, Song Title,or Song Genre. See VoiceRecognition on page 7-68.

The following playlist formats aresupported:. M3U (Standard and Extended). iTunes. PLS (Standard). WAX. ASX. RMP

The radio supports plugging a cellphone in as a USB drive as long asthe cell phone supports USB massstorage class or has USB disc drivesupport enabled.



While the USB source is active, usethe following to operate USBfunction:

TUNE/MENU Knob: Turn to scrollthrough the list. Turn quickly to fastscroll alphabetically through largelists.

J (Play/Pause): Press to start,pause, or resume play of the currentmedia source.

© SEEK (Previous/Reverse):. Press to seek to the beginning of

the current or previous track.If the track has been playing forless than five seconds, theprevious track plays. If playinglonger than five seconds, thecurrent track restarts.

. Press and hold to reversequickly through playback.Release to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.

¨ SEEK (Next/Forward):. Press to seek to the next track.

. Press and hold to advancequickly through playback.Release to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.

USB Menu

The following are available throughthe USB Menu:

Shuffle: Press to play the tracksrandomly. Press again to stopshuffle.

Play More Like This:

1. Press to automatically create aplaylist of songs that are like thesong currently playing.

2. The radio will show “PlaylistCreation Succeeded” andcontinue playing thecurrent song.

Playlist Creation Failed mayappear if a song is not found inthe Gracenote Database.

Delete Automatic Playlist: Pressto delete a More Like this playlist.

Folders: Press to open a folder listto access the files within the folderstructure.

Playlists:

1. Press to view the playlists onthe USB.

2. Select a playlist to view the listof all songs in that playlist.

3. Select a song from the list tobegin playback.

Artists:

1. Press to view the list of artistson the USB.

2. Select an artist name to view alist of all albums by the artist.

3. To select a song, press SongsList or press an album and thenselect a song from the list.

Albums:

1. Press to view the albums onthe USB.

2. Select the album to view a list ofall songs on the album.




Genres:

1. Press to view the genres onthe USB.

2. Select a genre to view a list ofall songs of that genre.


Songs:

1. Press to display a list of allsongs on the USB.

2. Songs are displayed as they arestored on the disc. To beginplayback, select a song fromthe list.

File System and Naming

The songs, artists, albums, andgenres are taken from the file’ssong information and are onlydisplayed if present. The radiodisplays the file name as the trackname if the song information is notavailable.

Playing from an iPod®

This feature supports the followingiPod models:. iPod classic® (6th generation). iPod nano® (3G, 4G, 5G,

and 6G). iPod touch® (1G, 2G, 3G,

and 4G)

There may be problems with theoperation and function in thefollowing situations:. When connecting an iPod on

which a more recent version ofthe firmware is installed than issupported by the infotainmentsystem.

. When connecting an iPod onwhich firmware from otherproviders is installed.

To connect an iPod:

1. Connect one end of the standardiPod USB cable to the iPod'sdock connector.

2. Connect the other end to theUSB port in the center console.

iPod music information displays onthe radio’s display and beginsplaying through the vehicle’s audiosystem.

The iPod battery rechargesautomatically while the vehicle is on.The iPod shuts off and stopscharging when the vehicle isshut off.

If the iPod is an unsupported model,it can still be listened to in thevehicle by connecting to theauxiliary input jack using a standard3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable.

iPod Menu



Use the iPod Menu to select:

Shuffle: Press to play the tracksrandomly. Press again to stopshuffle.

Play More Like This: Allows theradio to create playlists with songs/tracks that are similar to what isbeing listen to. The radio will createa playlist with up to 30 similarsongs. The playlist will appear in thePlaylist category of the menu forfuture listening.

1. Press to automatically create aplaylist of songs that are like thesong currently playing.

2. The radio will show "PlaylistCreation Succeeded" andcontinue playing thecurrent song.

Delete Automatic Playlists: Pressto delete a More Like This playlist.

Playlists:

1. Press to view the playlists onthe iPod.

2. Select a playlist name to view alist of all songs in the playlist.

3. Select the song from the list tobegin playback.

Artists:

1. Press to view the artists onthe iPod.

2. Select an artist name to view alist of all albums with songs bythe artist.

3. Select an album.


Albums:

1. Press to view the albums onthe iPod.

2. Select an album name to view alist of all songs on the album.


Songs:

1. Press to view a list of all songson the iPod.


Genres:

1. Press to view the genres onthe iPod.

2. Select a genre name to view alist of artists of that genre.

3. Select an artist to view allalbums of that genre.

Podcast:

1. Press to view the podcasts onthe iPod.

2. Select a podcast name to beginplayback.

Composers:

1. Press to view the composers onthe iPod.

2. Select the composer to view alist of songs by that composer.




Audio Books:

1. Press to view the audio bookson the iPod.

2. Select the audio book from thelist to begin playback.

Playing from an iPhone or iPad

This feature supports the followingiPhone or iPad models:. iPhone® (2G, 3G, 3GS, 4, 4S,

and 5). iPad® (1G, 2G)

Follow the same instructions asstated earlier for using an iPod. Touse voice recognition to play music,say “Play USB,” “Play Artist,” “PlayAlbum,” “Play Song,” or “PlayGenre.” See Voice Recognition onpage 7-68.

iPhone, iPod Touch and iPadTroubleshooting

When an iPhone, iPod touch,or iPad are connected through USBand Bluetooth, the audio may not beheard when the iPod source on the

radio is selected. If a phone call isreceived while listening to the iPodsource and there is no audio for theiPod after the source, then go to theAirplay icon on the device andselect dock connector or disconnectand reconnect the dock connectoron the device.

Some functionality may differ basedon operating system version ondevice.

USB Troubleshooting

If the device is not being recognizedor the music is missing screeninformation, restore the radiodefaults:

1. Press Config.

2. Press Vehicle Settings.

3. Press Return to FactorySettings.

4. Press Yes.

Pair the phone again and the devicewill have to index again.

Bluetooth Audio and VoiceRecognition

See Bluetooth Audio on page 7-41and Voice Recognition on page 7-68for information using voicerecognition with Bluetooth audio.

Make sure all devices have thelatest software downloaded.

Auxiliary DevicesThis vehicle has an auxiliary inputjack in the center console. Possibleauxiliary audio sources include:. Laptop computer. MP3 player. Tape player

This jack is not an audio output. Donot plug headphones into theauxiliary input jack. Set up anyauxiliary device while the vehicle isin P (Park).

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cablefrom the auxiliary device to theauxiliary input jack. When a deviceis connected, the system



automatically begins playing audiofrom the device over the vehiclespeakers.

If an auxiliary device has alreadybeen connected, but a differentsource is currently active, do one ofthe following:. Press SRCE to scroll all of the

available audio source screens,until the AUX source screen isselected.

. Say “Play Front AUX” usingvoice recognition to play theauxiliary device. See VoiceRecognition on page 7-68.

Bluetooth AudioIf equipped, music may be playedfrom a paired Bluetooth device. See“Pairing a Phone/Device” underBluetooth on page 7-75.

To play music through a Bluetoothdevice:

1. Power on the device, pair, andconnect the device.

2. Music can be launched by doingone of the following:. Press the Bluetooth Audio

screen button on theHome Page.

. Press SRCE until BluetoothAudio is selected.

. Press the SRC button onthe steering wheel controlsuntil Bluetooth Audio isselected. See SteeringWheel Controls onpage 5-2.

. Use voice recognition. SeeVoice Recognition onpage 7-68.

The music can be controlled byeither the infotainment controls orthe controls on the device.

When a phone is connected to thesystem through Bluetooth Audio thephone notifications and sounds maynot be heard on the phone untilBluetooth is disconnected.Notification features may vary based

on the phone. Check the phone’smanufacture information fornotification support.

Bluetooth Audio Menu

Press the Menu screen button andthe following may display:

Shuffle: Press the TUNE/MENUknob to turn shuffle on or off. Not alldevices support the shuffle feature.

When selecting Bluetooth audio, theBluetooth device internal musicplayer may not open depending onthe status of the device. All deviceslaunch and play back audiodifferently. Make sure the correctaudio source is playing on thedevice for Bluetooth audio playbackon the radio. When the vehicle isnot moving, use the device to beginplayback.

When selecting Bluetooth audio asa source, the radio may source toBluetooth Audio Paused screen andno audio playing. Press play on thedevice or press J to begin



playback. This may happendepending on how the devicecommunicates over Bluetooth.

Some phones support sendingBluetooth music information todisplay on the radio. When the radioreceives this information, it willcheck to see if any album art isavailable and display it.

When playing music on the radiofrom a Bluetooth device, make surethe Bluetooth device is unlockedand the intended music applicationis showing on the home screen.

For iPhone/iPod touch and iPaddevices, Bluetooth Audio will notwork if the device is connectedthrough the USB and Bluetooth atthe same time.

Navigation

Using the NavigationSystem

Use the NAV button on thefaceplate or Navigation on theHome Page to access thenavigation map.

Press the NAV button again tochange between alternative views ofthe normal split and full map views.

The Menu screen button at thebottom right side of the displayaccesses the Navigation Menu.

The touch-sensitive buttonsavailable are:



Destination Entry

Press Destination Entry to displaythe Destination home page. Select adestination option. See Destinationon page 7-48.

Heading Indicator

Press Heading Indicator to displaythe Map View. There are threeindicator settings:. 2D North Up: Displays North at

the top of the map screenregardless of the direction thevehicle is traveling.

. 2D Heading Up: Displays thedirection the vehicle is traveling.The shaded triangle icon pointsNorth.

. 3D Heading Up: Is the same as2D Heading Up, but the map isin 3D.

Map Modes

Press to change the view of themaps while using the navigationfunction. The system offers a varietyof full and split views. Some viewsare only selectable when routeguidance is active.

An alternative method to change theview of the maps would be to pressthe map mode icon.

Map Settings



Press Map Settings to display theMap Display line item. Press MapDisplay to select one of theavailable options:. Automatic. Day. Night

See Configure Menu on page 7-60.

Select Speed Limits to toggle thespeed limit display on or off.

Traffic

Press Traffic to display the TrafficMenu. Press the desired option.

Options available are:. All Traffic Events: Press to view

all reported traffic events whileon or off a planned route.

. Traffic Events on Route: Pressto view traffic events while on aplanned route.

. Traffic Settings: Press tocustomize traffic options. Thisfeature can also be accessed bypressing the traffic light screenbutton displayed at the left lowerside of the map screen. SeeConfigure Menu on page 7-60 inthis section.

Nearby POIs

Press to display a search list ofnearby POIs. Select thedesired POI.

POIs Along Route

Press to display a search list ofPOIs that lie along or near the routeto the destination. Select thedesired POI.

Show POIs on Map

Press to customize which major POIcategories are displayed onthe map.



Switch Route Time/Destination

Press to customize the arrival/traveltime and waypoint/destinationinformation displayed in the mainmap screen.

Current Position Info

Press to display a split screenshowing detailed information aboutthe vehicle position. This featurecan also be accessed by pressingthe vehicle information tab on thelower center of the display. Thelocation can be saved to theAddress Book by pressing Save inthe split screen.

Destination Position Info

Press to display a split map screenshowing the next waypoint/destination. The location can besaved to the Address Book bypressing Save in the split screen.

Map Adjustments

The system lets you adjust the scaleof view on the map. Also, as youdrive, the map scrolls automaticallybased on the direction of travel.

Map Scales

There are twomethods to changethe map scale:. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob

clockwise or counterclockwise tozoom out or in.

. Press the Map Scale + or −button on the bottom corners ofthe map screen to change thezoom level.

The map scale bar times out ifthe zoom level is not changedwithin a few seconds.

The scale can be configured forEnglish or metric units. To changefrom English to metric, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-21.

Scroll Features

. To scroll within the map, touchanywhere on the map screenand the scroll symbol displays.

. Tap the map to center at thatlocation on the screen.

. Press and hold the screen in anydirection outside the scrollsymbol to scroll the map in thatdirection.



. Scroll speed increases whentouching closer to the edge ofthe screen.

. Press NAV on the faceplate toexit map scrolling and return tothe current vehicle location onthe map.

Press the cycling arrows at the topof the map screen to toggle from thenormal top bar (Home and Fav) tothe audio information bar.

MapsThis section includes basicinformation about the mapdatabase.

The data is stored in internal flashmemory that is used in thenavigation system.

Detailed Areas

Road network attributes arecontained in the map database fordetailed areas. Attributes includeinformation such as street names,street addresses, and turnrestrictions. A detailed area includesall major highways, service roads,and residential roads. The detailedareas include points of interest(POIs) such as restaurants, airports,banks, hospitals, police stations,gas stations, tourist attractions, andhistorical monuments. The mapdatabase may not include data fornewly constructed areas or mapdatabase corrections. The

navigation system provides fullroute guidance in the detailed mapareas.

Navigation SymbolsFollowing are the most commonsymbols that appear on a mapscreen.

The vehicle symbol indicates thecurrent position and headingdirection of the vehicle on the map.



The destination symbol marks thefinal destination after a route hasbeen planned.

The waypoint symbol marks one ormore set waypoints.

A waypoint is a stopover destinationpoint added to the planned route.

The estimated time and distance tothe destination are displayed.

If waypoints have been added to thecurrent route, each waypointdestination displays estimated timeand distance.

This symbol indicates that the mapview is North up: North up displaysNorth at the top of the map screenregardless of the direction thevehicle is traveling.

Select this screen symbol to changethe view to Heading up or 3D.

This symbol indicates that the mapview is Heading up.

Heading up view displays thedirection the vehicle is traveling atthe top of the map screen. Theshaded triangle indicates North.

Press this screen symbol to changeto 3D mode.

The 3D symbol is the same as theHeading up symbol, but the map isin 3D.



The No GPS symbol appears whenthere is no Global PositioningSystem (GPS) satellite signal.

This symbol at the bottom of a mapscreen changes the current mapmode screen.

This symbol on the right of the mapscreen displays the speed limitwhile on a route. The speed limitmay not be accurate due tochanges from the Department ofTransportation, the local

municipalities or older map data.Always follow the posted speed limiton the road.

Driving on a Route

Urgent Maneuver Alert

The system will give an indicationthat the next maneuver is close.

Driving on a Highway

Driving on a Residential Road

Destination

If route guidance is not active, pressthe Destination screen button on theHome Page to access theDestination Entry screen. Severaloptions can be selected to plan aroute by entering destinations.



Some destination entry items suchas Previous Destinations, AddressBook, and My Home may be grayedout if no destination was previouslyentered or saved.

Letters of the alphabet, symbols,punctuation, and numbers, whenavailable, display on the navigationscreen as alpha/numeric keyboards.The alpha keyboard displays whendata needs to be entered.

ABC or QUERTY: Press to togglebetween ABC or QUERTY keyboardcharacter layouts.

ÄÖ: Press to access an alternatelanguage keyboard.

Sym: Use to select symbols.

Space: Use to enter a spacebetween characters or the words ofa name.

Delete: Press to delete an incorrectcharacter that has been selected.

Address Entry

Press the Address screen button todisplay the Address Entry screen.Set a route by entering the statename, city name, street name,house number, and intersection.

If no state or province has beenentered previously, the city andstate fields are not available. Pressthe screen button at the right of thecity name to select a state orprovince.

If the state or province waspreviously set and is displayed,press the screen button at the rightof the city name to change theselected state or province.

To make name selection easier, thesystem highlights only charactersthat are available after thepreviously entered one.

State: Enter a state name.

City: Enter a city name.

Street: Enter a street name.

House #: Enter a valid addressnumber.



Intersection: Enter a street namethat intersects with the selectedstreet.

Entering the city name first:

1. Enter the city name.

2. Enter the street name. Use theDelete screen button to deletean incorrectly entered character.

A list displays if six or fewernames are available. If there aremore than six, there is a matchcounter with a number ofavailable streets. Press the Listscreen button to view the list andselect the street.

3. Enter the house number.

4. Press the Done screen button atany time and the system tries toresolve a destination based onthe entered information, thendisplays it on the screen.

5. Press the Start Guidance screenbutton and the route calculates.

To Enter a Destination in Canada

To change the destination addressfrom the United States to Canada,the country will need to change inthe navigation system. To changethe country address:

1. Press the Destination screenbutton on the Home Page.

2. Press the address screen buttonto display the Enter Addressscreen.

3. Go to the State/Province lineoption and select. The Provinceentry screen displays. Select theCountry line option. The CountryList displays.

4. Select Canada.

5. Enter Province and confirm theselection.

Entering a Destination in OtherCountries

To change the destination addressfrom the United States to anothercountry, the country will need tochange in the navigation system.

To change the country address:

1. Press the Destination screenbutton on the Home Page.

2. Press the Address screen buttonto display the Address Entryscreen.

3. Go to the State/Province lineoption and select. The State/Province entry screen displays.



Select the Country line option.The available Country Listdisplays.

4. Select the desired country. Forexample, select Canada as adefault country.

5. Enter State/Province. Forexample, enter Ontario andconfirm the selection.

The destination in other countriescan also be changed using voicerecognition. See Voice Recognitionon page 7-68.

Points of Interest (POI)

Press the Points of Interest screenbutton on the Destination Entrypage. Several options can beselected to plan a route.

The POI List allows selection of adestination search by Category,Name, or Telephone Number.

Entering by POI name:

1. Select Search by Name.

2. Make sure the correct country,state/province, and city arepresent, then select Search.

3. Enter the POI name.

4. Select a few of the characters orspell the name in full, by usingthe alpha keyboard.

5. Select the Done screen button,or if the list has six or feweritems, a list of POIs willimmediately display.

6. Press the desired POI.




Previous Destinations

Select a destination from thePrevious Destination List. Up to15 points that have been previouslyentered can be recalled. If the list isfull, the oldest destinations areautomatically deleted once thenewest destinations are added.

Address Book

If no destination is saved to theaddress book, save a destination:

1. Press Destination on theHome Page.

2. Enter an address using any ofthe destination methods(Address Entry, POI Entry, etc.).

3. On the destination confirmationscreen, select Save.

4. The system displays the optionsName, Number, Icon, and Done.Press Done to save thedestination.

5. To customize the address bookentry, select Name, Number,or Icon.

If a destination is already saved tothe address book, press Destinationon the Home Page to display theAddress Book screen button.

Choose a destination by selectingan address that has been stored inthe address book.

1. Press the Address Book screenbutton. A list displays theaddress book entries.

2. Select the destination fromthe list.


To edit Address Book entries:

1. Select an item from theaddress book.

2. On the destination confirmationscreen, select Edit.

3. The system displays the optionsName, Number, Icon, andDelete. Press Delete to deletethe destination from theaddress book.

4. To customize the address bookentry, select Name, Number,or Icon.

Latitude/Longitude Coordinates

Choose a destination based onlatitudinal and longitudinalcoordinates.



To enter the location as coordinates,latitude and longitude:

1. Press Destination on the HomePage. Press the Latitude andLongitude screen button todisplay the screen above.

2. Select Latitude or Longitude tochange. Enter the coordinates indegrees, minutes, and seconds.

3. Press the Search screen buttonif the information is correct.

4. Press the Start Guidance screenbutton. The route calculates.

Favorite Routes

Adding a Favorite Route:

1. Press the Home PageDestination button to display theFavorite Routes screen button.

2. Press the Favorite Routesscreen button to display NewFavorite Route.

3. Select New Favorite Route andenter a favorite route name.

4. Press OK and the displayreturns to the favorite routes list.

5. Select the favorite route and adda waypoint using any of thedestination methods, such asaddress entry, POI entry, etc.

Selecting a Favorite Route:

1. Press the Home PageDestination button to display theFavorite Routes screen button.

2. Press the Favorite Routesscreen button to display a list ofavailable favorite routes.

3. Scroll and select a favorite route.

4. Press the Start Guidance screenbutton. The route calculates.

Deleting a favorite route:

1. Press the Home PageDestination button to display theFavorite Routes screen button.Press this button to display thelist of available favorite routes.

2. Scroll and select the route to bedeleted.

3. Press Edit.

4. Press Delete Favorite Route.



Changing the route name:

1. Press the Home PageDestination button to display theFavorite Routes screen button.Press this button to display thelist of available favorite routes.

2. Press the Edit screen button.

3. Select Edit Name.

4. Using the keypad, enterthe name.

5. Press the Done screen button.The new name will be in theFavorite Routes Menu.

My Home

If no home destination is entered,save a destination by pressing theHome Page Destination button.Enter a destination using any of thedestination entry methods (Address

Entry, POI Entry, etc.). Select Saveas Home from the destinationconfirmation screen.

If a destination is already saved ashome, press the Home PageDestination button to display the MyHome screen button. Press thisbutton to start route guidance.

Select from Map

. Press the Home PageDestination button to display theSelect from Map screen button.Press this button to display themap screen with a scroll symbolcentered on the map.

. Press the Zoom in/out button onthe screen and press the map tolocate the destination to select.Press and hold a finger on themap to activate fast scrolling.

. Press the Go button on thebottom of the screen to displaythe destination confirmationscreen.

. Press the Start Guidance screenbutton. The route calculates.

Travel Guide

Press the Travel Guide screenbutton on the Destination Entrypage. Several options can beselected to plan a route.



The Travel Guide POI entry listallows selection of a destinationsearch by category or name.

Entering by POI Category

1. Select Category from the POIList menu to access the POISelection screen display.

2. Enter the necessary informationby first selecting the location lineitem to access theLocation menu.

3. Select any of the line optionssuch as Nearby.

4. Select Category from the POISelection menu to access thePOI List.

5. Select any of the line optionssuch as All POIs.

6. Select Sort Method from the POISelection menu to access theSearch Order menu. Select oneof the two options available.These options are By Distanceor By Name.

7. Select Search.

8. Select the desired POI.

Entering by POI name:

1. Select Search by Name.

2. Make sure the correct country,state/province, and city arepresent, then select Search.

3. Enter the POI name.



4. Select a few of the characters orspell the name in full, by usingthe alpha keyboard.

5. Select the Done screen button,or if the list has six or feweritems, a list of POIs willimmediately display.

6. Press the desired POI.

The Travel Guide POI will havesome detailed information about theselection made. This informationmay include:. Brief Description. Address. Number. Hours of Operation

. Price

. Website

Photos may not be available forcertain locations or countries.

Destination Confirmation

Multiple options are available on thedestination confirmation screen:

Start Guidance: Press to start aroute calculation to the displayeddestination.

Show on Map: Press to switch tothe map view with the displayeddestination centered on the map.

Route Options: Press to changeroute options. See “Route Options”following.

Call: Press to initiate a phone callto the displayed phone number,if phone capability is available.

Save as Home: Press to save thedisplayed destination as your homedestination. The home destinationwill be stored at the top of the list ofdestinations in the address book.

Save/Edit: Press to save thedisplayed destination into theaddress book. If the displayeddestination is already stored in theaddress book, Edit will show as themenu item.



Route Options

Press to display various routeoptions.

Alternative Routes: If enabled, thesystem will provide an additionalscreen after Start Guidance hasbeen selected. Select Fastest,Shortest, or Eco calculated routesbefore selecting GO.

Fastest: This calculates for thequickest route.

Shortest: This calculates for theshortest route.

Eco: This calculates for the mostfuel efficient route based on speedand distance.

Under the Route Options menu,there are route preferences that bydefault are all enabled.A checkmark placed next to eachpreference indicates this. All ofthese preferences are used whencalculating the route. If any of thesepreferences are unselected, theroute will be calculated withoutincluding these preferences.

Use Highways: Deselect to avoidmajor roads.

Use Toll Road: Deselect to avoidtoll roads.

Use Ferries: Deselect to avoidferries.

Use Tunnels: Deselect to avoidtunnels.

Use Time Restricted: Deselect toavoid time restricted roads.

Use Car Train: Deselect to avoidcar trains.

Menu with Route GuidanceActive

Several functions can be performedafter a destination has beenentered. Press the Home PageDestination screen button to accessthe Route Menu screen.

Cancel Guidance

Press Cancel Guidance to cancelthe current route.



Destination List

Select Destination List to viewoptions for organizing waypoints.

Turn List

Select Turn List to view a list ofmaneuvers for the entire route.Press the Avoid screen button nextto one of the turn maneuvers to

avoid a segment of roads.A maximum of eight avoidedsegments are allowed.

Avoid List

Select Avoid List to display a list ofavoided road segments with theoption to remove the avoided itemsfrom the list.

Voice Prompt

Select Voice Prompt to view optionsto disable or manage navigationvoice prompts and traffic alertprompts.

Detour

Press Detour to display the routedetour options. Select to detour thewhole route or by a specificdistance.

Route Options

This feature can be accessed fromthe destination confirmation menuand Destination Menu with RouteGuidance Active. See “DestinationConfirmation” previously in thissection.

Waypoints

Up to three waypoints can be addedto the current route. The waypointscan be sorted (moved) or deleted.

To add a waypoint:

1. From the Destination List menu,press Add Waypoint.

2. Enter the waypoint by any of theadd destination methods. Thesystem calculates and highlightsthe route and the route can bestarted.

3. To add more waypoints, pressAdd Waypoint to add thewaypoint in the order desired onthe route.



To delete a waypoint:

1. From the Route menu, pressWaypoint List.

2. Press Delete Waypoints.

3. Select the waypoints to bedeleted. Press the Delete screenbutton.

The Sort Waypoint feature allowsreorganization of the destination list.

To sort a waypoint:

1. From the Route menu, pressWaypoint List.

2. Press Sort Waypoints.

3. Select the waypoint to move.

4. Select the location to move thewaypoint to.

Instead of deleting individualwaypoints, select Delete AllWaypoints to delete all waypoints atthe same time.

To save a destination list as afavorite route, select Save asFavorite.

OnStar® DestinationDownloadThe destination download lets anOnStar® subscriber ask an OnStarAdvisor to download a destination tothe navigation system. OnStar willsend address information andlocation coordinates of thedestination into the navigationsystem.

Using Destination Download

The navigation radio screen mustbe turned on before a download.

The navigation system displays“Please wait” as the address issearched within the map database.

If the address is not found within themap database, the system may uselatitude and longitude coordinates tolocate the destination.

If the system is unable to locate theaddress, a screen message, Sorry.There is no valid address for thegiven destination. Please tryanother one displays.



Route Guidance Not Active

If an OnStar destination isdownloaded while route guidance isnot active, the navigation systemdisplays a pop-up screen with thefollowing screen functions:

Start Guidance: Press to startroute calculation to thedestination(s) received.

Show on Map: Press to display theMap Screen.

Call: Press to initiate a call with aBluetooth Phone or OnStarHands-Free Calling (if available).

Save as Home: Press to set anaddress as a home destination.

Save: Press to save thedownloaded destination to theaddress book.

Route Guidance Active

If an OnStar destination isdownloaded while route guidance isalready active, the system displaysa pop-up screen with the followingscreen function:. Press Start Guidance; the

navigation system adds thedownloaded destination beforethe next waypoint of the existingroute (closest to the currentvehicle position).

. All other buttons on the pop-upscreen operate as describedunder “Route Guidance NotActive.”

Previous Destinations

Previously downloaded OnStardestinations are saved underPrevious Destinations in thenavigation system, where they canbe accessed or saved to theAddress Book.

Configure MenuThe Configuration Menu is used toadjust features and preferences,such as Sound, Radio, Nav(Navigation), Display, or TimeSettings.

1. Press the Config screen buttonon the Home Page.



2. Touch-tap the scroll bar until thedesired option displays. Selectthe desired settings to change.See the owner manual forinformation on adjusting mostvehicle settings. See “NavigationSettings” and “NavigationSettings Button” in this section.

Languages

Press the Config button on theHome Page or the CONFIG buttonon the faceplate to enter the menuoptions. Turn the TUNE/MENU knobor touch-tap the scroll bar to scrollthrough the available options. Pressthe TUNE/MENU knob or pressLanguages to display thelanguages. Select the desiredlanguage.

Time and Date Settings

From the Time and Date screenbutton, press to display the Timeand Date menu.

Automatic Clock Update: Whenenabled, this feature will set theclock automatically.

Set Time: Press the + or − toincrease or decrease the Hours andMinutes displayed on the clock.

Set Date: Press the + and − toincrease or decrease the day.

12 hr/24 hr Format: Press the12 Hour screen button for standardtime; press the 24 Hour screenbutton for military time.

Press the Back screen button tosave the adjustments.

Radio Settings

Press the Config button on theHome Page or the CONFIG buttonon the faceplate to enter the menuoptions. Turn the TUNE/MENU knobor touch-tap the scroll bar to scrollthrough the available options. Pressthe TUNE/MENU knob or pressRadio Settings to display the radiosettings menu. Press this feature tomake changes for radio informationdisplayed, preset pages, AutoVolume, and XM CategoriesRestore. See Satellite Radio onpage 7-15, for more informationabout XM Categories.

The Radio Settings are:

Auto Volume: Select OFF, Low,Medium, or High sensitivity toautomatically adjust the volume tominimize the effects of unwantedbackground noise that can resultfrom changing road surfaces, drivingspeeds, or open windows. Thisfeature works best at lower volume



settings where background noise istypically louder than the soundsystem volume.

Gracenote Options: Press toenable/disable Normalization usedto improve voice recognition andmedia groupings. See USB onpage 7-34, Auxiliary Devices onpage 7-40, and Bluetooth Audio onpage 7-41.

XM Channel Graphics: Press toenable/disable the XM Audio pagebackground on the XM Channeldisplay.

Max Startup Volume: Press to setthe maximum volume level forstartup that will be used even if ahigher volume had been set whenthe radio was turned off.

Number of Favorite Pages: Pressto select the number of FAV pagesto be displayed.

XM Categories: Press tocustomize which available XMCategories are used and displayed.

Software Version Information:Press to display information aboutthe system and update software ifavailable.

Phone Settings

See Bluetooth on page 7-75 in the“Phone” section for moreinformation on phone settings.

Navigation Settings

Press the Config button on theHome Page to enter the setupmenu. Turn the TUNE/MENU knobor touch-tap the scroll bar until theNavigation Settings option displays.Select this feature to make changesto Voice Prompt, Traffic Settings,Route Options, and Home Address.

Navigation Settings Button

Various navigation system settingsare available through theConfiguration Menu. Some optionsare only available after a route isplanned.

Press Navigation Settings to accessthe navigation system settings.



Voice Prompt

The Voice Prompt menu allowschanges to the voice promptfeatures.

Navigation Voice Prompts: Selectthe On or Off button to turn thevoice instructions on or off whiletraveling on a planned route.

Traffic Alert Prompts: Select theOn or Off button to turn the trafficvoice prompt on or off whiletraveling on a planned route.

Navigation Volume: SelectNavigation Volume to change thevolume of the navigation prompts.

Traffic Settings

Press to display the TrafficSettings menu.

Traffic Events (On/Off): Press toenable or disable the traffic feature.

Traffic Alert Prompts (On/Off):Press to enable or disable the trafficvoice prompts.

Route Based on TrafficConditions: Press to display asubmenu of options.. Route Based on Traffic

Conditions: Press to enable ordisable the route feature.

. Automatic Recalculation: Pressto enable automatic routerecalculation.

. Recalculation after Confirmation:Press to enable routerecalculation after confirmation.

Sort Method: Press to display asubmenu of sort options.. Sort By Distance: Press to

display traffic events in order ofdistance with the closest eventshown first.

. Sort By Name: Press to displaytraffic events in alphabeticalorder.

Show Traffic Events on Map:Press to display traffic icons onthe map.



. All Traffic Events On: Press toenable display of all traffic iconson the map.

. All Traffic Events Off: Press todisable display of all traffic iconson the map.

. User Defined: Press to definethe individual types of icons thatare displayed for traffic flow andtraffic conditions.

Traffic Flow Status

The traffic flow status will display ingreen, yellow, or red lines besidethe road.. Red indicates significantly

impaired traffic flow with averagespeed less than 40 km/h(25 mph).

. Yellow indicates slightly impairedtraffic flow with average speedbetween 40 and 73 km/h (25 and45 mph).

. Green indicates normal trafficflow with average speed above73 km/h (45 mph).

Closed Roads, Traffic Delays,Roadworks, Incidents, andAdvisories

Select the traffic event group fordisplay on the map screen. Someevents may cover more than onetraffic condition. See the followingtraffic conditions.

Traffic Conditions

The following traffic condition iconsmay display:

Stopped Traffic Traffic Jam

Accident Road Closed

Lane Narrows Road Work,Construction

Alert Road Condition

Road Visibility Other



Delete Saved Destinations

Press to delete all saveddestinations. A Delete SavedDestinations submenu displays.Select the desired options fordeletion and press delete at thebottom to continue. A confirmationscreen displays requesting to deleteor cancel.

Guidance Alerts

Press to enable the guidance alertpop-up to be viewed on the map oron the main screens such as audio,weather, phone, etc. A checkmarkappears to indicate the guidancealert mode is on.

Vehicle Settings

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-33.

Display Settings

Press the Config button on theHome Page or the CONFIG buttonon the faceplate, then select DisplaySettings from the list.

The following options may display:

Select Buttons for Home Page:Press to customize the first page ofthe Home Page.

Display Off: Press to turn off thedisplay. The display will return whenany radio buttons are pressed or thescreen is touched (if equipped).



Map Settings: Press to enter thesubmenu to change AutomaticZoom, enable Speed Limit displayon map, and change Map Displaysettings.. Map Display: Press to change

the screen background.

‐ The Automatic setting adjuststhe screen backgroundautomatically depending onthe exterior lighting conditions.

‐ The Day setting brightens themap background.

‐ The Night setting darkens themap background.

To change the overall brightnesssetting for the display, use thevehicle interior lighting instrumentpanel illumination control.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS)The position of the vehicle isdetermined by using satellitesignals, various vehicle signals, andmap data.

At times, other interference such asthe satellite condition, roadconfiguration, condition of thevehicle, and/or other circumstancescan affect the navigation system'sability to determine the accurateposition of the vehicle.

The GPS shows the current positionof the vehicle using signals sent bythe GPS Satellites. When thevehicle is not receiving signals fromthe satellites, a symbol appears onthe map screen. See NavigationSymbols on page 7-46.

This system might not be availableor interference can occur if any ofthe following are true:. Signals are obstructed by tall

buildings, trees, large trucks,or a tunnel.

. Satellites are being repaired orimproved.

For more information if the GPS isnot functioning properly, seeProblems with Route Guidance onpage 7-67 and If the System NeedsService on page 7-68.

Vehicle PositioningAt times, the position of the vehicleon the map could be inaccurate dueto one or more of the followingreasons:. The road system has changed.. The vehicle is driving on slippery

road surfaces such as sand,gravel, or snow.

. The vehicle is traveling onwinding roads or long straightroads.

. The vehicle is approaching a tallbuilding or a large vehicle.

. The surface streets run parallelto a freeway.



. The vehicle has been transferredby a vehicle carrier or a ferry.

. The current position calibrationis set incorrectly.

. The vehicle is traveling at highspeed.

. The vehicle changes directionsmore than once, or the vehicle isturning on a turn table in aparking lot.

. The vehicle is entering and/orexiting a parking lot, garage, or alot with a roof.

. The GPS signal is not received.

. A roof carrier is installed on thevehicle.

. Tire chains have been installed.

. The tires are replaced or worn.

. The tire pressure for the tires isincorrect.

. This is the first navigation useafter the map data is updated.

. The 12-volt battery isdisconnected for several days.

. The vehicle is driving in heavytraffic where driving is at lowspeeds, and the vehicle isstopped and started repeatedly.

Problems with RouteGuidanceInappropriate route guidance canoccur under one or more of thefollowing conditions:. The turn was not made on the

road indicated.. Route guidance might not be

available when using automaticrerouting for the next right orleft turn.

. The route might not be changedwhen using automatic rerouting.

. There is no route guidance whenturning at an intersection.

. Plural names of places might beannounced occasionally.

. It could take a long time tooperate automatic reroutingduring high-speed driving.

. Automatic rerouting mightdisplay a route returning to theset waypoint if heading for adestination without passingthrough a set waypoint.

. The route prohibits the entry of avehicle due to a regulation bytime or season or any otherregulation which may be given.

. Some routes might not besearched.

. The route to the destinationmight not be shown if there arenew roads, if roads haverecently changed, or if certainroads are not listed in the mapdata. See Maps on page 7-46.

To recalibrate the vehicle's positionon the map, park with the vehiclerunning for two to five minutes, untilthe vehicle position updates. Makesure the vehicle is parked in alocation that is safe and has a clearview of the sky and away from largeobstruction.



If the System NeedsServiceIf the navigation system needsservice and the steps listed herehave been followed but there arestill problems, see your dealer forassistance.

Map Data UpdatesThe map data provided in thevehicle is the most up-to-dateinformation available when thevehicle was produced. The mapdata is updated periodically,provided that the map informationhas changed.

For questions about the operation ofthe navigation system or the updateprocess, contact the GM Nav DiscCenter toll-free phone number,1-877-NAV-DISC (1-877-628-3472)or go to the center’s website,www.gmnavdisc.com. If updates areneeded, call the GM Nav DiscCenter or order a new Map Updateonline. To order map data, have the

vehicle’s Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) available. SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)on page 12-1.

After receiving the updated mapdata, see Maps on page 7-46.

Database CoverageExplanationsCoverage areas vary with respect tothe level of map detail available forany given area. Some areas featuregreater levels of detail than others.If this happens, it does not meanthere is a problem with the system.As the map data is updated, moredetail can become available forareas which previously had limiteddetail. See Map Data Updates onpage 7-68 for more information.

Voice RecognitionVoice recognition allows forhands-free operation of theinfotainment system features.

Voice recognition can be used whenthe radio is on or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-18. The systemmaintains a minimum volume level.

Using Voice Recognition

1. Press b / g on the steeringwheel. The audio system mutes.A voice prompt states, “Pleasesay a command.” Wait until thetone is heard before speaking.

If there is no tone, make surethat the volume is turned up.

While voice recognition is active,the system displays a g symbolin the top right of the screen.

2. Clearly speak one of thecommands listed later in thissection.



Press b / g twice on the steeringwheel to skip the voice promptmessages.

Canceling Voice Recognition

1. Press and release $ /i onthe steering wheel control tocancel a command, if the systemresponse does not match thevoice command, or say“Goodbye” or “Cancel.”

2. The system replies, “Goodbye.”

Helpful Hints for SpeakingCommands. When multiple commands are

available, choose the commandthat works best for you.

. Words in parentheses areoptional. For example, for thecommand “Tune FM(frequency),” saying “Tune FM87.7” or “Tune FM” are bothvalid commands.

. When the command isrecognized, the system willeither perform the function orask to confirm the choice.

. When the system does notrecognize the command, thesystem says “pardon.”

. If experiencing difficulty with thesystem recognizing a command,confirm that the command iscorrect. Try saying the commandclearly or wait for a brief momentafter the tone.

. Background noise such as aclimate control fan positioned onhigh, open windows, and veryloud outside noises, even if thewindows are closed, can causevoice commands to bemisunderstood.

. The system is able to recognizecommands in differentlanguages, such as English,Canadian French, and Spanish.The system only recognizescommands based on thelanguage selected.

. To increase or decrease thevoice volume during a voicerecognition session, turn thevolume knob of the radio,or press the volume steeringwheel control. If the volume isadjusted during a voicerecognition session, a Volumebar appears on the screenshowing the voice volume levelas it is being adjusted. This alsochanges the volume of theguidance prompts.

. When using navigationcommands, take the time tobecome familiar with theaddress. Long delays whengiving the address can result inthe system not recognizing theaddress or routing to differentlocation than intended.

. When providing the housenumber portion of the address,the system recognizes both digitformat and numerical text. Anexample would be to say,“3-0-0-0-1” or “ThirtyThousand One.”



. If the system providesdestination in another country onseveral attempts, say the“Change Country” command andsay the country of interest. Thecountry default is the UnitedStates. To enter a destination inCanada or Mexico, the countrywill first have to be changed inthe system.

Voice Recognition Help

To enter the help playback session,clearly speak one of the helpcommands.

Help: The system plays back morespecific help commands such asRadio Settings for the user tochoose from.

Radio: Use this command to learnabout how to select a band (AM,FM, or XM), and how to changeradio stations by speakingfrequency numbers.

Phone: Use this command to learnabout how to dial, pair a device,or delete a device.

My Media: Use this command tolearn how to play specific tracks,artists, albums, devices connectedto the USB port, or to changesources.

Settings: Use this command tolearn about how to turn Verbose onor off, or set the language.

Voice Recognition Commands

The following list shows the voicecommands available for theinfotainment system with a briefdescription of each. The commandsare listed with the optional words inparentheses. To use the voicecommands, see the previousinstructions.

Radio Commands

Tune AM, Tune FM, Tune XM,Tune Pandora, Tune Stitcher:Instructs the system to go to thespecific band and the last channel.

Tune AM (frequency), Tune FM(frequency), Tune XM (channelnumber), or Tune XM (channelname): Instructs the system to goto the specific station.

Thumbs Up: Instructs the systemto give the current song or station athumbs up in Pandora or Stitcher.

Thumbs Down: Instructs thesystem to give the current song orstation a thumbs down in Pandoraor Stitcher.

Phone Commands

Dial or Call (phone number orcontact): Instructs the system tostart a phone call. For example, say“Dial 1 248 123 4567.” To call aphone book contact, say “Dial” or“Call,” say the name and location,and then say “Dial.” For example,say “Call John at Home” or “CallJohn at Work.” If a number is notrecognized, the first number in thelist will be called.

Pair or Connect: Instructs thesystem to begin pairing a device.



Digit Dial: Instructs the system todial a phone number one digit at atime. After saying the digits,say “Dial.”

Redial or Redial Last Number:Instructs the system to dial the lastphone number called.

Select Device or Change Phone:Instructs the system to switch to adifferent paired device. The devicemust be selected from the screen orusing the TUNE/MENU knob.

Delete Device: Instructs thesystem to delete a paired device.

Read Text Messages or Read SMSMessages: Instructs the system tobegin reading text messages frompaired device.

Not all devices support textmessages. Applicable whereequipped.

My Media Commands

AUX, USB, or Bluetooth Audio:Instructs the system to change thesource.

The following commands only applyto USB, iPod, and iPhone sources.They are supported after the devicehas been indexed.

Play Artist (artist name): Instructsthe system to play songs by aspecific artist. For example, say“Play Artist <artist name>.”

Play Album (album title): Instructsthe system to play a specific album.

Play Song (song title): Instructsthe system to play a specific song.

Play Genre (genre name):Instructs the system to play songsof a particular genre.

Search Artist (artist name):Instructs the system to show a list ofall songs by a specific artist. Forexample, say "Search Artist<artist name>.”

Search Composer (composername): Instructs the system toshow a list of all songs by a specificcomposer. For example, say"Search Composer<composer name>.”

Search Album (album name):Instructs the system to show a list ofall songs by a specific album. Forexample, say "Search Album<album name>.”

Search Genre (genre name):Instructs the system to show a list ofall songs for a specific genre. Forexample, say "Search Genre<genre name>.”

Search Folder (folder name):Instructs the system to show a list ofall songs in a specific folder. Forexample, say "Search folder<folder name>.”

Search Playlist (playlist name):Instructs the system to show a list ofall songs in a specific playlist. Forexample, say "Search playlist<playlist name>.”

Search Audio Book (audio bookname): Instructs the system toshow a list of all tracks in a specificaudio book. For example, say"Search audio book <audiobook name>.”



Search Podcast (podcast name):Instructs the system to show a list ofall tracks in a specific podcast. Forexample, say "Search podcast<podcast name>.”

More Like This: Instructs thesystem to create a playlist of trackssimilar to the current track playing.

Settings Commands

Verbose (set) on (mode), Verbose(set) off (mode): Instructs thesystem to turn voice prompts on oroff. When off, this feature turns offvoice prompts.

Language (language): Instructsthe system to set the language.

List Devices: Instructs the systemto give a list of devices to use.

Other Commands

Goodbye: Instructs the system toend a phone call or voicerecognition.

Cancel: Instructs the system tocancel an action.

Go Back, Back, Previous:Instructs the system to go back to aprior menu.

Main Menu: Instructs the system togo to the main menu.

Yes, Yep, Yup, Ya, Sure, Right,Correct, OK, Positive, You Got it,Probably, You Bet: These can beused to say “Yes.”

No, Nope, Na, No way, Wrong,Incorrect, Negative, Not really, NoI said, No I Did Not, No I Do Not:These can be used to say “No.”

Next Page, Page Down: Instructsthe system to scroll forward onepage in a list.

Previous Page, Page Up: Instructsthe system to scroll back one pagein a list.

Navigation Commands (IfEquipped)

To activate the navigation voicerecognition:

1. Press b / g on the steeringwheel. The audio system mutes.A voice prompt says, “Pleasesay a command.” Wait until thetone is heard before speaking.

If there is no tone, make surethe volume is turned up.

While voice recognition is active,the system displays a symbol inthe top right of the screen.

2. Clearly speak the command“Navigation.”

3. Clearly speak one of thecommands in this section.

The following commands only applyonce the Navigation command isgiven.



Change Country: Changes thecountry origin to input a destinationfrom that region. The system willaccept United States, Canada,or Mexico.

Address or Destination: Allowsan address to be stated as aone-shot method. The systemwill recognize the address if statedall at once or say a city center.An example is to say,“200 Renaissance Street, Detroit,Michigan” or “Detroit, Michigan.”

Directed Address: Allows anaddress to be stated one step at atime. The format will be State, City,Street, then House Number.

Intersection: Allows anIntersection to be stated as thedestination. The format will beState, City, Street, then Intersection.

Home: Instructs the system to startguidance to address saved asMy Home.

Contact: When a phone is pairedto the system, which containsAddress Information stored forcontacts, the address associatedwith that contact can become aroute. If the system cannot resolvethe address, an error displays.

Points of Interest or POI: Allows aPoint of Interest to be stated as adestination. Become familiar withthe POI categories andsub-categories in the system bypressing Destination from the HomePage or DEST on the faceplate,then selecting Point of Interest. POIcommands for Along Route andAround Destination will be availableif route guidance is active.

Add Waypoint: Allows addition ofindividual waypoints or thedestination. The system will ask forthe choice of entry method tocontinue. An example is to say, “POIAlong Route” or “Intersection.”

Delete Waypoint: When guidanceis active, this command allows thedeletion of individual waypoints or

the destination. If guidance is notactive, the system will indicate thedestination list is empty.

Where Am I?, My Location,or Current Position: Instructs thesystem to give the current positionof the vehicle.

Help: The system plays back morespecific help commands associatedwith Navigation or a Navigationsub-feature.

Cancel Guidance or CancelRoute: Instructs the system tocancel guidance.

Entering a Destination in OtherCountries

For the voice recognition to respondto a local address, thecorresponding country needs to beset in the navigation system.

The country can also be set usingvoice commands. However, thecountry will change back to thedefault country when the vehicle iskeyed off.



1. Press b / g on the steeringwheel.

2. Say “Navigation.”

3. Say “Change Country.”

4. Say the country name. Forexample, say “Canada.”

OnStar Command (If Equipped)

To activate OnStar voicerecognition, press= on the mirror

or press b / g on the steeringwheel and say “OnStar” after thebeep. This will activate the OnStarvoice control. See OnStar Overviewon page 14-1.

Help Commands. Help. Hands-Free Calling (If Equipped). Turn-by-Turn Directions. OnStar Info

After each list of help commands,the following are available:. Go Back

. Repeat

. Cancel

. Help

. Goodbye

Hands-Free Calling. Call. Store. Commands

‐ Call

‐ Store

‐ My Number

‐ Minutes

‐ Store Last Number

‐ Digit Dial

‐ Redial

‐ Dial

‐ Number Recall

‐ Directory

‐ Digit Store

Turn-by-Turn Directions. Directory. Plan Route. Commands

‐ Directory

‐ Store Destination

‐ Plan Route

‐ Delete Destination

‐ Mute Directions

OnStar Info. Messages. Minutes. My Number. Commands

‐ Messages

‐ Virtual Advisor

‐ My Number

‐ Minutes

‐ Number Recall

‐ Advisor Playback



. Virtual Advisor

Virtual Advisor

Choose this option to connect to alive Advisor.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass-thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone, i.e. Siri or VoiceCommand. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To activate phone voice recognitionsystem, press and hold b / g onthe steering wheel for approximatelytwo seconds.

Bluetooth Phone/Devices

Bluetooth

Overview

For vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones anddevices, allowing:. Placing and receiving hands-free

calls.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle. The phone book willonly display when that phone isconnected.

. Placing outgoing calls by voicerecognition.

The system can be used while inON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,or Retained Accessory Power(RAP). The range of the Bluetoothsystem can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).The radio can connect to most

Bluetooth-enabled phones.Available features and functionsmay be dependent on the device.

On a current phone call screen, animage of the contact from yourphone's contact list can bedisplayed. Not all phones arecompatible with this feature.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons on the infotainmentsystem and the steering wheel tooperate the Bluetooth system.


b / g (Push to Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls and startvoice recognition.

$ /i (Mute/End Call): Press toend a call, decline an incoming call,or cancel voice recognition.

+ x − (Volume): Press + or − toincrease or decrease the volume.



Infotainment System Controls

For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Overviewon page 7-2.

b /> (Phone/Mute): Press toenter the Phone main menu. Pressand hold to mute or unmute.

Voice Recognition

The voice recognition system usescommands to control the systemand dial phone numbers.

When using voice recognition:. The system may not recognize

voice commands if there is toomuch background noise.

. A tone sounds to indicate thatthe system is ready for a voicecommand. Wait for the tone andthen speak.

. Speak clearly in a calm andnatural voice.

See Voice Recognition onpage 7-68.

Audio System

Sound comes through the vehicle'sfront audio system speakers andoverrides the audio system. Use theVOL/O knob during a call to changethe volume level. The adjustedvolume level remains in memory forlater calls. The system maintains aminimum volume level.

See Voice Recognition onpage 7-68.

Bluetooth Audio

See Bluetooth Audio on page 7-41.

Pairing with InfotainmentControls

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired and then connectedto the vehicle before it can be used.See your cell phone manufacturer'suser guide for Bluetooth functionsbefore pairing the cell phone. If aBluetooth phone is not connected,calls will be made using OnStarHands-Free Calling, if available.See OnStar Overview on page 14-1.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth-enabled phone and

an audio playback device can bepaired to the system at thesame time.

. Up to five devices can be pairedto the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, theradio will connect to the firstphone in the list or to the phonethat was previously connected.



Pairing a Phone/Device

1. Press the CONFIG buttonor b / >.

2. Select Phone Settings.

3. Select Pair Device (Phone). Theradio displays “Please startBluetooth search on your phone.Confirm or enter number:.” If thedevice supports a four-digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN), it will display. The PIN isused in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone to be paired to thevehicle. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide.

5. Locate and select the devicenamed after the vehicle makeand model in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3, or toconfirm the six-digit codematches. The system recognizesthe new connected phone afterthe pairing process is complete.

6. If the phone prompts to acceptconnection or allow phone bookdownload, select always acceptand allow. The phone book maynot be available if not accepted.Some phones will putconnection request orphonebook request in a pulldown task bar at the top of thescreen. Drag down the task barand look for connection/phonebook request and accept.

7. Repeat to pair additionalphones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones/Devices

1. Press the CONFIG button.


3. Select Device List.

Deleting a Paired Phone/Device




4. Select the phone to delete andfollow the screen prompts.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different phone, thenew phone must be in the vehicleand available to be connected to theBluetooth system before theprocess is started.




4. Select the new phone to connectto and follow the screenprompts.

Pairing with Voice Recognition

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired and then connectedto the vehicle before it can be used.See the cell phone manufacturer'suser guide for Bluetooth functionsbefore pairing the cell phone. If aBluetooth phone is not connected,calls will be made using OnStarHands-Free Calling, if available.See OnStar Overview on page 14-1.



Pairing a Phone

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Please say acommand,” followed by a tone.

2. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith “Please search forBluetooth devices on yourphone, select your vehicle,confirm and enter the PINprovided on the screen.”

3. Start the search for Bluetoothdevices on the phone. Thenselect the device and follow theinstructions on the phone byeither entering the four-digit PINor confirming the six-digitpasscode. The PIN is used inStep 4.

4. Locate and select the devicenamed after the vehicle makeand model in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3 or toconfirm the six-digit codematches. The system responds“successfully paired.”

5. Repeat Steps 1−4 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.


2. Say “Device List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name to delete isunknown, see “Listing All Pairedand Connected Phones.”


2. Say “Delete Device.”

3. The system responds with: “Todelete a device, please touch itsname on the screen.” Select thedevice to delete on the displayand it will be removed.

To cancel this command, press$ /i on the steering wheelcontrol or press the / BACK buttonon the radio faceplate.

Connecting to a Different Phoneor Device

To connect to a different cell phone,the system looks for the nextavailable cell phone. Depending onthe cell phone to be connected, thiscommand may need to be repeated.


2. Say “Change Phone.”. To select a device, press

the name on the display.. If another cell phone is not

found, the original phoneremains connected.



Making a Call Using PhoneBook and InfotainmentControls

For cell phones that support thephone book feature, the Bluetoothsystem can use the contacts storedon the cell phone to make calls. Seethe cell phone manufacturer‘s userguide or contact the wirelessprovider to find out if this feature issupported.

When a cell phone supports thephone book feature, the PhoneBook and Call Lists menus areautomatically available.

The Phone Book menu allowsaccess to the phone book stored inthe cell phone to make a call.

The Call Lists menu allows accessto the phone numbers from theIncoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, andMissed Calls menus on the cellphone to make a call.

The radio will display the first 1,000contacts and the phone numbers foreach contact including Home, Work,Mobile, and Other.

To make a call using the PhoneBook menu:

1. Press b / > once on the radioor the Phone screen button.

2. Select Phone Book.

3. Select the letter group of thephone book entry to scrollthrough the list of names/numbers.

4. Select the name.

5. Select the number to call.

To make a call using the CallLists menu:


2. Select Call Lists.

3. Select the Incoming Calls,Outgoing Calls, or MissedCalls list.

4. Select the name or numberto call.

Making a Call Using theInfotainment Controls

To make a call:


2. Press Enter Number.

3. Enter the phone number.

4. Select OK to start dialing thenumber.

5. Select Call to place the call.

To make a call using voicerecognition, see “Making a Call”under Bluetooth on page 7-75.

Accepting or Declining a Call

When an incoming call is received,the infotainment system mutes anda ring tone is heard in the vehicle.



Using the Infotainment Controls

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to“Answer” or “Decline” and press theTUNE/MENU knob or press Acceptor Decline on the screen.

Using Steering Wheel Controls

Press b / g to answer or $ /i todecline the call.

Call Waiting Using theInfotainment Controls

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

Switching Between Calls (CallWaiting Calls Only)

To switch between calls turn andpress the TUNE/MENU knob andselect Switch Call or select SwitchCall on the screen.

Call Waiting Using SteeringWheel Controls

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To decline answering theincoming call, press Decline onthe screen or take no action.

. Press $ /i to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Conference Calling Using theInfotainment Controls

Conference calling and three-waycalling must be supported on theBluetooth phone and enabled by the

wireless service carrier to work. Thisfeature is only supported when thevehicle is not moving.

To start a conference while in acurrent call:

1. Turn and press the TUNE/MENUknob and select Enter Number.

2. Enter the phone number andselect OK.

3. After the call has been placed,turn the TUNE/MENU knob andchoose Merge Calls.

4. To add more callers to theconference call, repeat Steps 1−3. The number of callers thatcan be added is limited by yourwireless service carrier.

Ending a Call


Turn and press the TUNE/MENUknob and select Hang Up or pressHang Up on the screen.

Using Steering Wheel Controls

Press $ /i.



Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.


Turn and press the TUNE/MENUknob and select Mute Call. Pressagain to cancel mute.

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred.

To Transfer Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle, press the Transfer Callbutton on the screen or press andhold the b / g button on thesteering wheel.

To Transfer Audio to the BluetoothSystem from a Cell Phone

Use the audio transfer feature onthe cell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation. Press the Transfer callbutton on the screen or press andhold the b / g button on thesteering wheel.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The in-vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call. This isused when calling a menu-drivenphone system.


1. Turn and press the TUNE/MENUknob and select Enter Number.

2. Enter the phone number,or select Enter Number on thescreen and select digits, thenpress OK.

Hands-Free Phone

Using Bluetooth VoiceRecognition

To use voice recognition, press theb / g button on the steering wheel.Use the commands below for thevarious voice features. Foradditional information, say “Help”while in a voice recognition menu.

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: These commands canbe used interchangeably to dial aphone number.

Digit Dial: This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re-dial: This command dials thelast number used on the cell phone.



Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command

To call a number:


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, followed by “Dial.”

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

To call using a name tag:


2. Say “Dial” or “Call” and then saythe name tag. For example “CallJohn at Work.”


Using the “Digit Dial” Command

This allows a phone number to bedialed by entering the digits one ata time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time, todial. After each digit is entered,the system repeats back thedigit it heard followed by a tone.After the last digit has beenentered, say “Dial.”

If an unwanted number is repeatedback, say “Clear” to clear the lastnumber.


Using the “Redial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Redial.” Thesystem dials the last numbercalled from the connected cellphone.


Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe vehicle Bluetooth system, it willbe retained. This includes phonepairing information. For directionson how to delete this information,see “Deleting a Paired Phone/Device.”

Text MessagingFor vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system,if equipped with text messaging, candisplay text messages, play back amessage over the audio system,and send a predefined message.Not all phones support all functionsand work with Bluetooth. The radioonly supports the receipt of SMS



text messages. A request may needto be accepted on the phone orsome phone settings may need tobe changed to allow text messagingto function. See the cell phonemanufacturer’s user guide.

Using Text Messaging

1. Press the Messages button onthe Home Page or select TextMessages from the Phone mainscreen. Until all text messagesare retrieved, the Home Pageicon will remain gray and thePhone main screen option willbe removed.

This feature will be disabled ifthe paired Bluetooth device doesnot support SMS TextMessaging.

2. Once all messages areretrieved, the Text MessageInbox displays. Select amessage for viewing. Viewingmessages is only available whilethe vehicle is not in motion.

3. View the message or selectListen to hear the messagethrough voice recognition. Themessage view screen is lockedout while the vehicle is inmotion.

. Select Call to dial the contact ornumber associated with the text.Not all phones allow calling thesender of the message and willresult in not being able toselect Call.

. Select Reply to reply to a textmessage that was received asan incoming message. Not allphones allow message sending.



. Select the desired message fromthe display of predefinedmessages to send as the replymessage.

. Select Send to send thatmessage.

. Select Back to cancel and returnto the previous screen.

Incoming Text Messages

A pop-up screen is displayed whenthere is an incoming text. Thepop-up will remain on the screenuntil Dismiss is selected.. Select Listen to hear the

message through voicerecognition.

. Select View to view themessage. Viewing is notavailable while the vehicle is inmotion.

. Select Reply to reply to themessage using a predefinedmessage.

. Select Call to dial the contact ornumber associated with the text.

. Select Dismiss to close out theincoming pop-up messagescreen.

Text Messaging Settings

Text Message Settings are availablefrom the Text Message Inbox.



. Select Manage PredefinedMessages to create a userdefined message that can beused later to reply to a textmessage.

. Select Text Alerts to choose thealert behavior for incoming textmessages:

‐ Text alert with tone

‐ Tone only

‐ Off

Trademarks andLicense AgreementsFCC Information

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

“Made for iPod” and “Made foriPhone” mean that an electronicaccessory has been designed toconnect specifically to iPod oriPhone and has been certified bythe developer to meet Appleperformance standards.

iPod and iPhone are trademarks ofApple Computer, Inc., registered inthe U.S. and other countries.

Fees and Taxes: Subscription fee,taxes, one time activation fee, andother fees may apply. Subscriptionfee is consumer only. All fees andprogramming subject to change.Subscriptions subject to CustomerAgreement available atwww.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM®

service only available in the48 contiguous United States andCanada.

Explicit Language Notice: Channelswith frequent explicit language areindicated with an “XL” preceding thechannel name. Channel blocking isavailable for SiriusXM SatelliteRadio receivers by notifyingSiriusXM:. USA Customers — See

www.siriusxm.com or call1-866-635-2349.



It is prohibited to copy, decompile,disassemble, reverse engineer,hack, manipulate, or otherwisemake available any technology orsoftware incorporated in receiverscompatible with the SiriusXM®

Satellite Radio System or thatsupport the SiriusXM website, theOnline Service or any of its content.Furthermore, the AMBER voicecompression software included inthis product is protected byintellectual property rights includingpatent rights, copyrights, and tradesecrets of Digital VoiceSystems, Inc.

General Requirements:. A License Agreement from

SiriusXM® is required for anyproduct that incorporatesSiriusXM Technology and/or foruse of any of the SiriusXMmarks to be manufactured,distributed, or marketed in theSiriusXM Service Area.

Gracenote

Gracenote®, Gracenote logo andlogotype, and the "Powered byGracenote" logo are either aregistered trademark or a trademarkof Gracenote, Inc. in the UnitedStates and/or other countries.

Bluetooth

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

Pandora (If Equipped)

Pandora is a registered trademarkof Pandora Media, Inc., used underlicense.

Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories.

Map End User LicenseAgreement (OptionalEquipment Applies WhereEquipped)

END USER TERMS

The data (“Data”) is provided foryour personal, internal use only andnot for resale. It is protected bycopyright, and is subject to thefollowing terms and conditionswhich are agreed to by you, on theone hand, and PanasonicAutomotive Systems Company ofAmerica (“PANASONIC”) and itslicensors (including their licensorsand suppliers) on the other hand.

© 2013 NAVTEQ. All rightsreserved.

The Data includes certaininformation and related contentprovided under license to NT fromthird parties and is subject to the



applicable supplier terms andcopyright notices set forthat the following URL:http://corporate.navteq.com/supplier_terms.html.

In addition, the Lonely Planet TravelGuide content is subject to thefollowing supplier notices (ifequipped):

© 2013 Lonely Planet PublicationsPty Ltd. All rights reserved.

PANASONIC and its contentproviders have tried to make thisinformation as accurate as possible,but it is provided “as is” andPANASONIC and its contentproviders accept no responsibilityfor any loss, injury or inconvenienceresulting from this information. Youshould verify critical information (likevisas, health and safety) before youtravel.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS

Personal Use Only. You agree touse this Data together with theGeneral Motors MyLink or IntelliLink

Connected Navigation RadioPlatform for the solely personal,non-commercial purposes for whichyou were licensed, and not forservice bureau, time-sharing orother similar purposes. Accordingly,but subject to the restrictions setforth in the following paragraphs,you agree not to otherwisereproduce, copy, modify, decompile,disassemble, create any derivativeworks of, or reverse engineer anyportion of this Data, and may nottransfer or distribute it in any form,for any purpose, except to theextent permitted by mandatory laws.

Restrictions

Except where you have beenspecifically licensed to do so byPANASONIC, and without limitingthe preceding paragraph, you maynot (a) use this Data with anyproducts, systems, or applicationsinstalled or otherwise connected toor in communication with vehicles,capable of vehicle navigation,positioning, dispatch, real time routeguidance, fleet management or

similar applications; or (b) with or incommunication with any positioningdevices or any mobile orwireless-connected electronic orcomputer devices, including withoutlimitation cellular phones, palmtopand handheld computers, pagers,and personal digital assistantsor PDAs

Warning

The Data may contain inaccurate orincomplete information due to thepassage of time, changingcircumstances, sources used andthe nature of collectingcomprehensive geographic data,any of which may lead to incorrectresults.

No Warranty

This Data is provided to you “as is,”and you agree to use it at your ownrisk. PANASONIC and its licensors(and their licensors and suppliers)make no guarantees,representations or warranties of anykind, express or implied, arising bylaw or otherwise, including but not



limited to, content, quality, accuracy,completeness, effectiveness,reliability, fitness for a particularpurpose, usefulness, use or resultsto be obtained from this Data,or that the Data or server will beuninterrupted or error-free.

Disclaimer of Warranty

PANASONIC AND ITS LICENSORS(INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORSAND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANYWARRANTIES, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, OF QUALITY,PERFORMANCE,MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEOR NON-INFRINGEMENT. SomeStates, Territories and Countries donot allow certain warrantyexclusions, so to that extent theabove exclusion may not applyto you.

Disclaimer of Liability

PANASONIC AND ITS LICENSORS(INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORSAND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BELIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF

ANY CLAIM, DEMAND ORACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THENATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THECLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTIONALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURYOR DAMAGES, DIRECT ORINDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULTFROM THE USE OR POSSESSIONOF THE INFORMATION; OR FORANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, ORANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGESARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OFOR INABILITY TO USE THISINFORMATION, ANY DEFECT INTHE INFORMATION, OR THEBREACH OF THESE TERMS ORCONDITIONS, WHETHER IN ANACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORTOR BASED ON A WARRANTY,EVEN IF PANASONIC OR ITSLICENSORS HAVE BEENADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITYOF SUCH DAMAGES. SomeStates, Territories and Countries donot allow certain liability exclusions

or damages limitations, so to thatextent the above may not applyto you.

Export Control

PANASONIC shall not export fromanywhere any part of the Data orany direct product thereof except incompliance with, and with alllicenses and approvals requiredunder, applicable export laws, rulesand regulations, including but notlimited to the laws, rules andregulations administered by theOffice of Foreign Assets Control ofthe U.S. Department of Commerceand the Bureau of Industry andSecurity of the U.S. Department ofCommerce. To the extent that anysuch export laws, rules orregulations prohibit NT fromcomplying with any of its obligationshereunder to deliver or distributeData, such failure shall be excusedand shall not constitute a breach ofthis Agreement.



Entire Agreement

These terms and conditionsconstitute the entire agreementbetween PANASONIC (and itslicensors, including their licensorsand suppliers) and you pertaining tothe subject matter hereof, andsupersedes in their entirety any andall written or oral agreementspreviously existing between us withrespect to such subject matter.

Governing Law

The above terms and conditionsshall be governed by the laws of theState of Illinois (with respect to useof Data for the Americas and/or theAsia Pacific territories), and the lawsof The Netherlands (with respect toData for the Middle East, Africa,Russia and Europe territories),without giving effect to (i) its conflictof laws provisions, or (ii) the UnitedNations Convention for Contracts forthe International Sale of Goods,which is explicitly excluded. Youagree to submit to the jurisdiction ofthe State of Illinois for any and all

disputes, claims and actions arisingfrom or in connection with the Dataprovided to you hereunder.

Government End Users

If the Data is being acquired by oron behalf of the United Statesgovernment or any other entityseeking or applying rights similar tothose customarily claimed by theUnited States government, this Datais a “commercial item” as that termis defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”)2.101, is licensed in accordancewith these End-User Terms, andeach copy of Data delivered orotherwise furnished shall be markedand embedded as appropriate withthe following “Notice of Use,” andshall be treated in accordance withsuch Notice:

NOTICE OF USE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)

NAME:

NAVTEQ North America, LLC, c/oNokia

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)

ADDRESS:

425 West Randolph Street,Chicago, IL 60606.

This Data is a commercial item asdefined in FAR 2.101 and is subjectto these End-User Terms underwhich this Data was provided.

© 2013 NAVTEQ. All rightsreserved.

If the Contracting Officer, federalgovernment agency, or any federalofficial refuses to use the legendprovided herein, the ContractingOfficer, federal government agency,or any federal official must notifyNAVTEQ prior to seeking additionalor alternative rights in the Data.



2 NOTES


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Climate Control Systems

Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

1. Driver Temperature Control

2. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

3. Air Conditioning

4. Air Delivery Mode Controls


8-2 Climate Controls

5. Front Defrost

6. ZONE

7. Passenger Temperature Control

8. Recirculation

9. Fan Control

10. Rear Window Defogger

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): When thisbutton is pressed, the systemautomatically controls the insidetemperature, the air delivery mode,the air conditioning compressor, andthe fan speed. When AUTO appearsin the display, the system is in fullautomatic operation. If any of thecontrols are manually adjusted, theAUTO indicator turns off in thedisplay.

1. Press the AUTO button, if theAUTO indicator does not appearon the display.

2. Adjust the temperature to acomfortable setting.

3. Adjust the air outlets as desired.

4. Let the system stabilize for a fewminutes.

In cold weather, the system starts inthe recirculation mode with the fanoff. As the engine warms up, warmair is directed to the floor outlets,before automatically changing tobi-level mode with a reduced fanspeed.

Do not cover the solar sensor in thecenter of the instrument panel, nearthe windshield. See “Sensors” laterin this section.

The automatic climate controlsystem may not work as desired ifone or more of the instrument paneloutlets are closed.

Manual Operation

On/Off: Press9 to turn thesystem on or off.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. The fanspeed appears on the infotainmentdisplay.

Press the AUTO button to return toautomatic operation.

Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls: Thetemperature can be adjustedseparately for the driver and thepassenger. Turn the temperaturecontrols clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the temperature.

The temperature setting between21°C (70°F) and 23°C (74°F) isrecommended.

The temperature settings for eachside are shown in the temperaturecontrol knob displays and theinfotainment display. If thetemperature control is past 30°C(86°F), the display shows HI(hottest). Turning it past 16°C(61°F), shows LO (coolest).

ZONE: Press to synchronize thedriver and passenger temperatures.

Single-Zone Mode: All zones areset to the same temperature. “Driverhas control” will be displayed on the



infotainment display. Turn the drivertemperature control to adjust thesystem temperature.

Dual-Zone Mode: Allows differenttemperatures to be set for the driverand passenger sides.

Enter Dual-Zone mode by adjustingthe passenger side temperaturewhen in Single-Zone mode.

Air Delivery Mode Controls:PressY,),-, or[ to changethe current airflow mode. Thecurrent mode selection appears inthe display screen. Changing themode cancels the automaticoperation and the system goes intosemi-automatic operation. PressAUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Select from the following:

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets andconsole outlet.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneloutlets, console outlet and the floor

outlets. Cooler air is directed to theupper outlets and warmer air to thefloor outlets.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets with some air directedto the outer instrument panel,windshield, and side window outlets.

- (Defog): Air is directed to thewindshield, floor and side windowoutlets. Use this mode to clear thewindows of fog or moisture andwarm the passengers.

5 FRONT (Defrost): Press toturn the defrost on or off. The5FRONT indicator appears in thedisplay. A portion of the air isdirected to the windshield and sidewindow outlets, with some airdirected to the outer instrumentpanel outlets.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

Air Conditioning

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning system onor off. The# appears on theinfotainment display when the airconditioning is on. When the airconditioning is turned off,# OFFappears on the infotainment display.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture and heat fromthe air.

The air conditioning mightautomatically turn off during heavyacceleration, abnormal systempressure or very cold outsidetemperatures.

Recirculation

h (Recirculation): Press tochange the air intake betweenrecirculated air and outside air.happears on the infotainment displaywhen recirculation is activated.

The recirculation mode recyclesinterior air and is not recommendedfor extended use. If it is used for a



long period of time, the systemautomatically lets some outside airinto the vehicle for ventilation.

Do not use the recirculation mode ifoccupants are smoking.

The recirculation mode cannot beturned on in defrost mode.

AUTOh is displayed when thesystem is automatically controllingthe combination of outside andrecirculated air for bestperformance.

Pollution Mode: This mode selectsrecirculation when the vehicle speedis less than 15 km/h (9 mph) toprevent exhaust fumes fromentering the vehicle in slow movingtraffic.

To select, see “Pollution Mode” inthe Climate and Air Quality menuunder Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-33.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog or frostfrom the rear window. It only workswhen the ignition is in ON/RUN.

+ REAR (Rear WindowDefogger): Press to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. Theindicator on the button turns on. Therear window defogger turns offautomatically if it is left on.

{ Caution

Using a razor blade or sharpobject on the inside rear windowcan damage the antenna ordefogger. Repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Do not stick anything to the rearwindow.

Heated Mirrors: If equipped withheated outside rearview mirrors, themirrors heat to help clear fog or frostfrom the surface of the mirror when

the rear window defog button ispressed. See Heated Mirrors onpage 2-17.

Sensors

The automatic climate controlsystem uses sensors to maintaintemperatures. The solar sensor ison the instrument panel near thewindshield, and the outsidetemperature sensor is in front of theradiator.

The solar sensor monitors the solarradiation when operating in AUTOmode, adjusting the temperature,fan speed and air delivery.

The system may also supply coolerair to the side of the vehicle facingthe sun. The recirculation mode willalso be activated, as necessary.

The outside temperature sensor canbe affected by radiant heat whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To prevent false temperaturereadings, the displayed temperaturewill not update at low vehiclespeeds.



If the vehicle has been turned off forless than four hours, thetemperature at start up will berecalled from previous operation.

Do not cover the sensors; otherwisethe automatic climate control systemwill not work properly.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation

If equipped with the remote startfeature, when it is activated, theclimate control system will use theprevious settings. See RemoteVehicle Start on page 2-8.

Regular Operation

Adjusting the Temperature

When the climate control systemhas stabilized, adjust thetemperature to a comfortablesetting.

Quick Cool Down

When entering the vehicle on a hotday, open the windows for a shorttime to allow the hot air to escape.

Automatic Transmission

If the vehicle is stopped for a longtime in hot weather and the engineis running and the air conditioning isoperating, move the shift lever toN (Neutral) or P (Park).

Hissing Sound

A slight hissing sound when the airconditioning is turned off is normal.

Water

Water may drip from underneath thevehicle, this is normal.

Unsealed Dusty Roads

To help prevent dust from enteringyour vehicle:. When following other vehicles

on dusty roads and the dust isairborne, selecth.

. If the dust is not airborne, selectoutside air and set the fancontrol to high speed.

. Close all windows.

. Do not use recirculation for longperiods of time.



Air Vents

The air outlets have adjustablevanes that move up or down and leftor right to change the direction ofthe airflow. Use the thumbwheelslocated near the air outlets on theinstrument panel to shut off theairflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors may adversely affectperformance of the system.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside thevehicle more effectively.

Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe vehicle has a passengercompartment air filter that filters theoutside air entering the vehicle. Thefilter removes contaminants, suchas pollen and dust. See your dealerfor more information about filterreplacement.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Track Events and CompetitiveDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-10Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-15Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-22Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . 9-27Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-29

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Competitive Driving Mode . . . 9-31Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 9-32

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

Driver Assistance SystemsDriver AssistanceSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Assistance Systems forParking or Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-36

Assistance Systems forDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-46Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-47California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-47Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49


9-2 Driving and Operating

Trailer TowingTrailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.



{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the Infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3-8.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.



If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Electric Power Steering

The vehicle has electric powersteering. It does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel and isheld against that position for anextended period of time, powersteering assist may be reduced.

If the steering assist is used for anextended period of time, powerassist may be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when thesystem cools down.

See specific vehicle steeringmessages under Service VehicleMessages on page 5-31. See yourdealer if there is a problem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.. Maintain a reasonable steady

speed through the curve.. Wait until the vehicle is out of

the curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. The Antilock Brake System(ABS) allows steering whilebraking.

Off-Road Recovery



The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.

. Steering or CorneringSkid — too much speed orsteering in a curve causes tiresto slip and lose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or other

material on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Track Events andCompetitive DrivingTrack events or competitive drivingmay affect the vehicle warranty. Seethe warranty manual before usingthe vehicle for track testing or othercompetitive driving.



{ Caution

If the vehicle is used for trackevents and competitive driving,the engine may use more oil thanit would with normal use. Low oillevels can damage the engine.Check the oil level often and atthe proper level. See Engine Oilon page 10-6.

Be sure to check the oil level oftenduring racing or other competitivedriving and keep the level at or nearthe upper mark that shows theproper operating range on theengine oil dipstick.

For track events or competitivedriving, it is recommended that thebrake fluid be replaced with a highperformance brake fluid that has adry boiling point greater than 279°C(534°F). After conversion to the highperformance brake fluid, follow thebrake fluid service

recommendations outlined by thefluid manufacturer. Do not usesilicone or DOT-5 brake fluids.

Because the fluid temperatures maybe higher, it is necessary to changethe rear axle fluid every 24 hours ofracing or competitive driving. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

{ Caution

During a first time track or racingevent, high rear axletemperatures can occur. Damagecould be caused to the rear axleand would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Do not drive as long or as fast thefirst time the vehicle is driven onthe track or raced.

For extended track use, GMrecommends installing a reardifferential cooler to protect therear axle.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If this

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.

. Pass with caution.

. Keep windshield wipingequipment in good shape.

. Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

. Have good tires with propertread depth. See Tires onpage 10-34.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior

temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow thevehicle on a long downhill slopecan cause brake overheating, canreduce brake performance, andcould result in a loss of braking.Shift the transmission to a lowergear to let the engine assist thebrakes on a steep downhill slope.



{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. This can causeoverheating of the brakes andloss of steering. Always have theengine running and the vehiclein gear.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

Traction Control should be turnedon. See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-30.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops on slippery roads, butapply the brakes sooner than whenon dry pavement. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) on page 9-26.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.



Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13-5.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle and set the fan speed tothe highest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems”.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9-21.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restart



the vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Controlon page 9-30.

{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10-71.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way the

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

vehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

1. Number of Occupant SeatingPositions

2. Maximum Vehicle CapacityWeight

3. Size of the Original EquipmentTires

4. Recommended Cold TireInflation Pressure

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's centerpillar (B-pillar). The Tire andLoading Information label showsthe number of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thetire size of the originalequipment tires (3) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (4). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10-34 andTire Pressure on page 10-41.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–1. Locate the statement "The

combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.



4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the "XXX"amount equals 1400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manualto determine how this

reduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing on page 9-50for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules, and trailering tips.

Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs).

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).

Example 2


2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg(750 lbs).



3. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


2. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to the vehicle'scenter pillar (B-pillar). The labeltells the gross weight capacity of

the vehicle, called the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants,fuel, and cargo. Never exceedthe GVWR for the vehicle, or theGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for either the front orrear axle.

And, if there is a heavy load, itshould be spread out. See“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit” earlier in thissection.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

If you put things inside thevehicle— like suitcases, tools,packages, or anythingelse— they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ Warning

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.



Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InUse the following precautions toimprove performance:. For the first 1000 km (621 mi):

Do not make full throttle starts.

Avoid downshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.

Do not drive at any one constantspeed.

Use moderate acceleration inlower gears.

Avoid vehicle speeds above110 km/h (68 mph).

. Between the first 1000 km(621 mi) and 5000 km (3,107 mi),heavy acceleration in lowergears may be used.

Vehicle speeds above 110 km/h(68 mph) should be limited tofive minutes per use.

. Avoid making hard stops for thefirst 350 km (217 mi) to avoidpremature wear and earlyreplacement of brakes.

Ignition Positions

The vehicle has an electronickeyless ignition with pushbuttonstart.

Pressing the button cycles it throughthree modes: ACC/ACCESSORY,ON/RUN/START, and Stopping theEngine/OFF.

The transmitter must be in thevehicle for the system to operate.If the pushbutton start is notworking, the vehicle may be near astrong radio antenna signal causinginterference to the Keyless Accesssystem. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2-3.

To shift out of P (Park), the vehiclemust be in ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN and the brake pedal mustbe applied.

Stopping the Engine/OFF (NoIndicator Lights): When thevehicle is stopped, press theENGINE START/STOP button onceto turn the engine off.

If the vehicle is in P (Park), theignition will turn off, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9-18.

If the vehicle is not in P (Park), theignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and display amessage in the Driver Information



Center (DIC). See TransmissionMessages on page 5-32. When thevehicle is shifted into P (Park), theignition system will switch to OFF.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto OFF. On vehicles with anautomatic transmission, the shift

lever must be in P (Park) to turnthe ignition switch to the OFFposition.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeElectric Parking Brake onpage 9-27.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for longer thantwo seconds, or press twice infive seconds.

ACC/ACCESSORY (AmberIndicator Light): This mode allowsyou to use some electricalaccessories when the engine is off.

With the ignition off, pressing thebutton one time without the brakepedal applied will place the ignitionsystem in ACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition will switch from ACC/ACCESSORY to OFF afterfive minutes to prevent batteryrundown.

ON/RUN/START (Green IndicatorLight): This mode is for driving andstarting. With the ignition off, andthe brake pedal applied, pressingthe button once will place theignition system in ON/RUN/START.Once engine cranking begins,release the button. Engine crankingwill continue until the engine starts.See Starting the Engine onpage 9-17. The ignition will thenremain in ON/RUN.

Service Only Mode

This power mode is available forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. With the vehicle off, and



the brake pedal not applied,pressing and holding the button formore than five seconds will placethe vehicle in Service Only Mode.The instruments and audio systemswill operate as they do in ON/RUN,but the vehicle will not be able to bedriven. The engine will not start inService Only Mode. Press thebutton again to turn the vehicle off.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

{ Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

{ Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipmenton page 9-50.

Starting Procedure

1. With the Keyless Accesssystem, the transmitter must bein the vehicle. Put your foot onthe brake pedal and push theSTART button. When the enginebegins cranking, let go of thebutton.

The idle speed will go down asthe engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

If the transmitter is not in thevehicle or something isinterfering with the transmitter,the Driver Information Center(DIC) will display a message.See Key and Lock Messages onpage 5-29.

If the battery in the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterneeds replacing, the DIC willdisplay a message. The vehiclecan still be driven. See “Startingthe Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” in RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ENGINESTART/STOP button is pressed,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the button is



pressed for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent geardamage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engineis already running. Enginecranking can be stopped bypressing the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time.

{ Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by pressing theENGINE START/STOP buttonimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushing

the accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you press the ENGINESTART/STOP button, for up to amaximum of 15 seconds. Wait atleast 15 seconds between eachtry, to allow the cranking motorto cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the button andthe accelerator. If the vehiclestarts briefly but then stopsagain, do the same thing. Thisclears the extra gasoline fromthe engine. Do not race theengine immediately after startingit. Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)The power windows will operatewhen the ignition is in the ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY positions.

Once the ignition is turned off, RAPallows the power windows tocontinue to operate for up to10 minutes. If a door is openedduring this time, they will bedeactivated.

The audio system will bedeactivated only if the driver door isopened.

Shifting Into Park1. Hold the brake pedal down and

set the parking brake.

See Electric Parking Brake onpage 9-27.

2. Hold the button on the shift leverand push the lever toward thefront of the vehicle into P (Park).

3. Turn the ignition off.



Leaving the Vehicle With theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.It could overheat and catch fire.

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9-18.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, the vehicle mustbe in P (Park) and the parkingbrake set.

Release the button and check thatthe shift lever cannot be moved outof P (Park).

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weight ofthe vehicle puts too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park”listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, thevehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release is designed toprevent movement of the shift leverout of P (Park), unless the ignition isin ON/RUN and the brake pedal isapplied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9-volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10-69.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Place the ignition in ON/RUN.

3. Press the shift lever button.

4. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.



If still unable to shift out of P (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpress the shift lever buttonagain.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, see your dealer.

Shift Lock Manual Release

If jump starting the vehicle did notwork, the shift lock manual releasemust be used.

To access the shift lock manualrelease:

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Remove the trim from the centerconsole, in front of the shiftlever.

3. Insert a tool into the opening asfar as it will go and move theshift lever out of P (Park).If P (Park) is selected again, theshift lever will be locked again.Have the cause of the problemfixed by your dealer.

4. Refit the trim to the centerconsole.



Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.



Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park on page 9-18and Engine Exhaust on page 9-21.

AutomaticTransmission

Press the select button on the frontof the shift lever to move into anyposition.

When the shift lever position ischanged, the lever position isindicated on the bottom of the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

The engine will not start unless theshift lever is in P (Park) orN (Neutral).

P (Park): This position locks therear wheels. It is the best position touse when the engine is startedbecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9-18.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatic



transmission shift lock controlsystem. Fully apply the brake pedalfirst and then press the shift leverbutton before shifting from P (Park)when the ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY. If the vehiclewill not shift out of P (Park), easepressure on the shift lever and pushthe shift lever all the way intoP (Park) while maintaining brakeapplication. Then press the shiftlever button and move the shift leverinto another gear. See Shifting outof Park on page 9-19.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

At low vehicle speeds, R (Reverse)can also be used to rock the vehicleback and forth to get out of snow,ice, or sand without damaging thetransmission. See If the Vehicle IsStuck on page 9-10 for additionalinformation.

{ Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

{ Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): Use this position forgeneral driving. The transmissionautomatically selects theappropriate gear according to thecurrent load and driving conditions.



{ Caution

If the vehicle accelerates slowly,or does not shift gears, thetransmission could be damaged.Have the vehicle servicedright away.

Sport Shift Mode

Sport Shift mode can be selectedwhere maximum responsiveness isrequired.

When operated in Sport Shift mode,the transmission will delay upshiftsand allow earlier downshifts.

In addition, the transmission cansense enthusiastic driving, at whichpoint it may delay upshifting anddownshift earlier when braking. Thisis designed to maximize vehicleperformance.

To activate sport shift mode:

1. Move the shift lever to D (Drive).

2. Push the shift lever to the right.

Sport Mode On is displayed onthe DIC.

Do not move the shift lever to+ (Plus) or − (Minus), otherwiseActive Select mode will beenabled.

3. To return to Normal Shift mode,move the shift lever left, toD (Drive). Sport Mode Off isdisplayed on the DIC.

On the bottom of the display, Sappears as long as Sport Shiftmode is selected.

Normal Shift Mode

Normal shift mode is recommendedfor normal or freeway driving, as itprovides optimum fuel economy.

When the shift lever is moved toD (Drive), normal shift mode isselected.

Manual Mode

Active Select (A/S) Mode

A/S mode allows gears to beselected manually.

It can also provide engine brakingby selecting the appropriate lowergear on a steep downhill grade.



To enable A/S mode:

1. Move the shift lever to D (Drive).

2. Push the lever to the right.

3. Shift to the required gear:

To shift up a gear, briefly pushthe lever forward toward the+ (Plus) and release it.

To shift down a gear, briefly pullthe lever rearward toward the− (Minus) and release it.

After changing the gear andreleasing the shift lever, it returns tothe center position on the right sideof the selector.

On the bottom of the display, M andthe currently selected gear appearas long as A/S mode is selected.

Alternatively, the paddles can beused to shift to the required gear:

To shift up a gear, briefly pull the+ (Plus) paddle toward the steeringwheel and release it.

To shift down a gear, briefly pull the− (Minus) paddle toward the steeringwheel and release it.. The transmission will shift to a

selected gear only if the enginespeed is within a suitable range.

If not suitable, SHIFT DENIEDwill be displayed in the DIC, andthe transmission will not shiftgears. Continuing to hold thelever in the − (Minus) positionwill select the requested gear assoon as the vehicle speeddecreases to the allowed speedfor that gear.

. If the engine speed becomes toolow for the currently selectedgear, the transmission willautomatically shift down, eventhough A/S mode is stillselected.

. While in A/S mode, 2 (Second)or 3 (Third) gear starts can beselected from a standing start.This is useful for gentleacceleration on slipperysurfaces.



To disable A/S mode and return toNormal Shift mode, push the shiftlever to the left, to position D (Drive).On the bottom of the display, D isdisplayed.

To disable A/S mode and return toSport Shift mode, hold the shift leverin the + (Plus) position for more thanone second. On the bottom of thedisplay, S is displayed.

Temporary Active Select(A/S) Mode

A/S can also be operated fromD (Drive) using the steering wheelpaddles only. With the vehicle inmotion, briefly pulling the + (Plus) or− (Minus) steering wheel paddles atany time will engage TemporaryA/S mode.

In this mode A/S functions as ifactivated from Sport mode, exceptthat the transmission willautomatically exit Temporary A/Smode to Normal Shift mode if any ofthe following conditions are met:. The vehicle speed drops below

approximately 10 km/h (6 mph).. No shift paddle is pressed, and

steady driving withoutaccelerating, decelerating,or cornering is detected forapproximately seven seconds.

. The + (Plus) steering wheelpaddle is pulled and held formore than one second.

. The shift lever is moved out ofD (Drive) to Sport Shift mode.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has ABS, an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself.A momentary motor or clicking noisemight be heard while this test isgoing on, and it might even benoticed that the brake pedal movesa little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5-16.



If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpyou steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehicle

suddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brakeat the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Electric Parking Brake

The vehicle has an Electric ParkingBrake (EPB). The switch is on thecenter console. The EPB canalways be activated, even if theignition is off. To prevent drainingthe battery, avoid repeated cycles ofthe EPB when the engine is notrunning.

The system has a red parking brakestatus light and an amber parkingbrake warning light. See ElectricParking Brake Light on page 5-15and Service Electric Parking Brake



Light on page 5-15. There are alsoparking brake-related DriverInformation Center (DIC) messages.See Brake System Messages onpage 5-26. In case of insufficientelectrical power, the EPB cannot beapplied or released.

Before leaving the vehicle, checkthe red parking brake status light toensure that the parking brake isapplied.

EPB Apply

To apply the EPB:

1. Be sure the vehicle is at acomplete stop.

2. Lift up the EPB switchmomentarily.

The red parking brake status lightwill flash and then stay on once theEPB is fully applied. If the redparking brake status light flashescontinuously, then the EPB is onlypartially applied or there is aproblem with the EPB. A DICmessage will display. Release theEPB and try to apply it again. If the

light does not come on, or keepsflashing, have the vehicle serviced.Do not drive the vehicle if the redparking brake status light is flashing.See your dealer. See ElectricParking Brake Light on page 5-15.

If the amber parking brake warninglight is on, lift up on the EPB switchand hold it up. Continue to hold theswitch until the red parking brakestatus light remains on. If the amberparking brake warning light remainson, see your dealer.

If the EPB is applied while thevehicle is moving, the vehicle willdecelerate as long as the switch isheld up. If the switch is held up untilthe vehicle comes to a stop, theEPB will remain applied.

If the EPB fails to apply, the rearwheels should be blocked toprevent vehicle movement.

EPB Release

To release the EPB:

1. Place the ignition in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUNposition.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Push down momentarily on theEPB switch.

The EPB is released when the redparking brake status light is off.

If the amber parking brake warninglight is on, release the EPB bypushing down on the EPB switchand holding it down. Continue tohold the switch until the red parkingbrake status light is off. If either lightstays on after release is attempted,see your dealer.

{ Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake systemand cause premature wear or

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

damage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

Automatic EPB Release

The EPB will automatically release ifthe vehicle is running, placed intogear, and an attempt is made todrive away. Avoid rapid accelerationwhen the EPB is applied, topreserve parking brake lining life.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This featureautomatically uses the stabilitysystem hydraulic brake controlmodule to supplement the powerbrake system under conditionswhere the driver has quickly and

forcefully applied the brake pedal inan attempt to quickly stop or slowdown the vehicle. The stabilitysystem hydraulic brake controlmodule increases brake pressure ateach corner of the vehicle until theABS activates. Minor brake pedalpulsation or pedal movement duringthis time is normal and the drivershould continue to apply the brakepedal as the driving situationdictates. The brake assist featurewill automatically disengage whenthe brake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)This vehicle has an HSA feature,which may be useful when thevehicle is stopped on a grade. Thisfeature is designed to prevent thevehicle from rolling, either forward orrearward, during vehicle drive off.After the driver completely stopsand holds the vehicle in a completestandstill on a grade, HSA will beautomatically activated. During the

transition period between when thedriver releases the brake pedal andstarts to accelerate to drive off on agrade, HSA holds the brakingpressure for a maximum oftwo seconds to ensure that there isno rolling. The brakes willautomatically release when theaccelerator pedal is applied withinthe two-second window. It will notactivate if the vehicle is in a drivegear and facing downhill, or if thevehicle is facing uphill and inR (Reverse).



Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl

System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, anelectronic stability control system.These systems help limit wheel slipand assist the driver in maintainingcontrol, especially on slippery roadconditions.

TCS activates if it senses that anyof the drive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, TCS applies the brakes tothe spinning wheels and reducesengine power to limit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak activates when thevehicle senses a difference betweenthe intended path and the directionthe vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak selectively appliesbraking pressure to any one of the

vehicle wheel brakes to assist thedriver in keeping the vehicle on theintended path.

If cruise control is being used andtraction control or StabiliTrak beginsto limit wheel spin, cruise control willdisengage. Cruise control may beturned back on when roadconditions allow.

Both systems come onautomatically when the vehicle isstarted and begins to move. Thesystems may be heard or felt whilethey are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. Thisis normal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn TCS off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck onpage 9-10 and “Turning theSystems Off and On” later in thissection.

The indicator light for both systemsis in the instrument cluster. Thislight will:. Flash when TCS is limiting

wheel spin.. Flash when StabiliTrak is

activated.. Turn on and stay on when either

system is not working.

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC), andd comes on and stays on toindicate that the system is inactiveand is not assisting the driver inmaintaining control. The vehicle issafe to drive, but driving should beadjusted accordingly.



If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.


Drive the vehicle. If d comes onand stays on, the vehicle may needmore time to diagnose the problem.If the condition persists, see yourdealer.

Turning the Systems Offand On

To turn the system off, press theTCS/StabiliTrak button on the centerconsole.

To turn off only TCS, press andrelease the TCS/StabiliTrak button.The traction off light i displays inthe instrument cluster.

To turn TCS on again, press andrelease the TCS/StabiliTrak button.The traction off light i displayed inthe instrument cluster will turn off.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin whenthe TCS/StabiliTrak button ispressed, the system will not turn offuntil the wheels stop spinning.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,press and hold the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton until the traction off light iand StabiliTrak OFF light g comeon and stay on in the instrumentcluster.

To turn TCS and StabiliTrak onagain, press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button. The traction offlight i and StabiliTrak OFF light gin the instrument cluster turn off.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-2.

Competitive Driving ModeThe Competitive Driving Modesystem is designed to allowincreased performance whileaccelerating and/or cornering. Thisis accomplished by regulating andoptimizing engine, steering, andbrake performance. This mode is foruse at a closed course race trackand is not intended for use on publicroads. It will not compensate fordriver inexperience or lack offamiliarity with the race track.Drivers who prefer to allow thesystem to have more control of the



engine and brake systems areadvised to turn the normal TCS andStabiliTrak systems on.

Competitive Driving Mode

Competitive Driving Mode controlsengine power while the StabiliTraksystem helps maintain directionalcontrol of the vehicle by selectivebrake application. In this mode, TCSis optimized. Adjust your drivingstyle to account for the availableengine power.

The g light is on when the vehicle isin the Competitive Driving Mode.

This optional handling mode can beselected by pressing the g buttonquickly two times. The appropriatemessage displays in the DIC. SeeRide Control System Messages onpage 5-31 for more information.

When the g button is pressedagain, the TCS and StabiliTraksystems are on. The appropriatemessage displays briefly in the DIC.

{ Warning

The Competitive Driving Modesystem is designed for a closedcourse race track and notintended for use on public roads.The system is not intended tocompensate for lack of driverexperience or familiarity with therace track.

Limited-Slip Rear AxleVehicles with a limited-slip rear axlecan give more traction on snow,mud, ice, sand, or gravel. Whentraction is low, this feature allowsthe drive wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle. Thelimited-slip rear axle also gives thedriver enhanced control whencornering hard or completing amaneuver, such as a lane change.

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, the vehicle canmaintain a speed of about 40 km/h(25 mph) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow 40 km/h (25 mph).

If the brakes are applied, the cruisecontrol is disengaged.

If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak®

system and begins to limit wheelspin while using cruise control, thecruise control automaticallydisengages. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-30. If a collision alert occurswhen cruise control is activated,cruise control is disengaged. SeeForward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-40. When roadconditions allow you to safely use itagain, the cruise control can beturned back on.



{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. Do not use thecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads. 1 (On/Off): Press to turn the

cruise control system on and off.A white cruise control indicatorappears in the instrument cluster.

* (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

RES/+ (Resume/Accel): Move thethumbwheel up briefly to make thevehicle resume to a previously setspeed or hold upwards toaccelerate. If cruise control isalready active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET/− (Set/Coast): Move thethumbwheel down briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control.If cruise control is already active,use to decrease speed.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise button turned off when cruisecontrol is not being used.

To set a speed:

1. Press 1.

2. Get to the speed desired.

3. Move the thumbwheel downtoward SET/− and release it.The cruise control indicator turnsgreen.

4. Remove foot from theaccelerator.



Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle reaches about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, move thethumbwheel up toward RES/+briefly. The vehicle returns to theprevious set speed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Move the thumbwheel up toward

RES/+ and hold it until thevehicle accelerates to thedesired speed, and thenrelease it.

. To increase the speed in smallincrements, move thethumbwheel up toward RES/+briefly and then release it. Each

time this is done, the vehiclegoes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph)faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Move the thumbwheel toward

SET/− and hold until the desiredlower speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To slow down in smallincrements, move thethumbwheel toward SET/−briefly. Each time this is done,the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle slows down to the previouslyset cruise control speed. Whilepressing the accelerator pedal orshortly following the release tooverride cruise control, brieflymoving the thumbwheel towardSET/– will result in cruise control setto the current vehicle speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to maintain thevehicle speed. When the brakes areapplied, the cruise control isdisengaged.



Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage cruise control,

step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. To turn off the cruise control,press 1.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if 1 is pressedor if the vehicle is turned off.

Driver AssistanceSystemsThis vehicle may have features thatwork together to help avoid crashesor reduce crash damage whiledriving, backing, and parking. Readthis entire section before usingthese systems.

{ Warning

Do not rely on the DriverAssistance Systems. Thesesystems do not replace the needfor paying attention and drivingsafely. You may not hear or seealerts or warnings provided bythese systems. Failure to useproper care when driving mayresult in injury, death, or vehicledamage. See Defensive Drivingon page 9-3.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Under many conditions, thesesystems will not:

. Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or animals.

. Detect vehicles or objectsoutside the area monitored bythe system.

. Work at all driving speeds.

. Warn you or provide you withenough time to avoid a crash.

. Work under poor visibility orbad weather conditions.

. Work if the detection sensoris not cleaned or is coveredby ice, snow, mud, or dirt.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take actionand apply the brakes and/or steerthe vehicle to avoid crashes.



Assistance Systems forParking or BackingWhen the vehicle is in R (Reverse),the Rear Vision Camera (RVC) andRear Parking Assist may help thedriver to avoid a crash or to reducecrash damage while backing andparking. Some models may alsohave Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA), Automatic Parking Assist(APA), and/or Front Parking Assist.

When the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse), the RVC displays animage of the area behind the vehiclein the center stack display. Whenthe vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), the screen returns tothe previous content, after a shortdelay. To see the previous contentsooner, press one of the radiobuttons. If the message ServiceRear Camera System is displayed,the vehicle may need service.

{ Warning

The RVC system does not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,animals, or any other objectlocated outside the camera's fieldof view, below the bumper,or under the vehicle. Perceiveddistances may be different fromactual distances. Do not back thevehicle using only the RVCscreen, during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers,or where there could be crosstraffic. Failure to use proper carebefore backing may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.Always check behind and aroundthe vehicle before backing.

1. View Displayed by the Camera

1. View Displayed by the Camera

2. Corners of the Rear Bumper



Displayed images may be farther orcloser than they appear. The areadisplayed is limited and objects thatare close to either corner of thebumper or under the bumper do notdisplay.

On vehicles with the Rear CrossTraffic Alert (RCTA), a triangle withan arrow may also display on theRVC screen to warn of trafficcoming from either direction. Thissystem detects objects coming fromup to 20 m (65 ft) from the left orright side behind the vehicle. Whenan object is detected beeps soundfrom the left or right side, dependingon the direction of the detectedvehicle.

With Rear Park Assist, and ifequipped with Front Park Assist, asthe vehicle moves at speeds of lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph) the sensors onthe bumpers detect objects up to2.5 m (8 ft) behind and 1.2 m (4 ft) infront of the vehicle within a zone25 cm (10 in) high off the ground

and below bumper level. Thesedetection distances may be lessduring warmer or humid weather.

{ Warning

The parking assist system doesnot detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectslocated below the bumper or thatare too close or too far from thevehicle. It is not available atspeeds greater than 8 km/h(5 mph). To prevent injury, death,or vehicle damage, even withparking assist, always check thearea around the vehicle andcheck all mirrors before movingforward or backing.

An obstacle is indicated by audiblebeeps. The interval between thebeeps becomes shorter as thevehicle gets closer to the obstacle.When the distance is less than30 cm (12 in) the beeping is acontinuous tone for five seconds.

Beeps for Front Parking Assist arehigher pitched than for Rear ParkingAssist.

Turning the Features On or Off

TheX button near the shift leveris used to turn on or off the Frontand Rear Parking Assist. Theindicator light next to the buttoncomes on when the features are onand turns off when the featureshave been disabled.

The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)parking assist symbols, guidancelines, and Rear Cross Traffic Alert



(RCTA) can be turned on or offthrough Vehicle Personalization.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-33.

Automatic ParkingAssist (APA)

If equipped, the APA systemsearches for and steers the vehicleinto parallel or perpendicular parkingspots. When using APA, you muststill shift gears, and control thebrakes and accelerator. The Driverinformation Center (DIC) andaudible beeps help to guide parkingmaneuvers.

{ Warning

APA does not apply the brakes.APA may not detect objects in theparking space, objects that aresoft or narrow, objects high off theground such as flatbed trucks,or objects below ground levelsuch as large potholes. Always

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

verify that the parking space isappropriate for parking a vehicle.APA does not respond to changesin the parking space, such asmovement of an adjacent vehicle,or a person or object entering theparking space. APA does notdetect or avoid traffic that isbehind or alongside of thevehicle. Always be prepared tostop the vehicle during theparking maneuver.

The system is available when thevehicle speed is below 30 km/h(18 mph). PressO to enable thesystem to begin searching for aspace that is large enough to park.The system cannot detect whether itis a legal parking space.

If equipped with perpendicularparking mode, press and hold theAPA button during the searchprocess to switch the APA parkingmode between perpendicular andparallel parking. APA searches forparking spaces to the right of the



vehicle. To search for a parkingspace to the left, turn on the left turnsignal.

After completely passing a largeenough space bordered by twovehicles or other objects, an audiblebeep occurs and a red symboldisplays in the DIC.

APA will instruct the vehicle to stoponce a large enough space is found.Follow the instructions in the DIC.When instructed to drive in reverse,shift to R (Reverse) to engageautomatic steering. The steeringwheel will vibrate briefly as areminder to remove hands from thesteering wheel. Check surroundingsand continue braking or acceleratingas needed, and be prepared to stopto avoid vehicles, pedestrians,or objects. If the vehicle is inR (Reverse), but does not steer intothe expected space, this may bebecause the system is maneuveringthe vehicle into a previouslydetected space. The APA systemdoes not need service.

If the vehicle exceeds 10 km/h(6 mph), APA is automaticallydisengaged and Automatic Steeringwill turn off. A DIC progress arrowdisplays the status of the parkingmaneuver. Depending on the spacesize, additional maneuvers may berequired, and there will be additionalinstructions. When changing gears,

allow the automatic steering tocomplete before continuing theparking maneuver. Upon completionof a successful maneuver, APA willbeep and display a PARKINGCOMPLETE message. Place thevehicle in P (Park).

APA may automatically disengage if:. The steering wheel is used by

the driver.. The maximum allowed speed is

exceeded.. There is a failure with the APA

system.. Electronic stability control or

antilock brakes are activated.. An important vehicle message is

displayed in the DIC.

To cancel APA, press the APAbutton again.

When the System Does Not Seemto Work Properly

The APA system may require ashort period of driving along curvesto calibrate.



Assistance Systems forDrivingIf equipped, when driving thevehicle, Forward Collision Alert(FCA), Lane Departure Warning(LDW), and Side Blind Zone Alert(SBZA) can help to avoid a crash orreduce crash damage.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, the FCA system mayhelp to avoid or reduce the harmcaused by front-end crashes. Whenapproaching a vehicle ahead tooquickly, FCA provides a red flashingalert on the windshield and rapidlybeeps. FCA also lights an ambervisual alert if following anothervehicle much too closely.

FCA detects vehicles within adistance of approximately 60 m(197 ft) and operates at speedsabove 40 km/h (25 mph).

{ Warning

FCA is a warning system anddoes not apply the brakes. Whenapproaching a slower-moving orstopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,or when following a vehicle tooclosely, FCA may not provide awarning with enough time to helpavoid a crash. FCA does not warnof pedestrians, animals, signs,guardrails, bridges, constructionbarrels, or other objects. Be readyto take action and apply thebrakes. For more information, seeDefensive Driving on page 9-3.

FCA can be disabled with the FCAsteering wheel control.

Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

FCA warnings will not occur unlessthe FCA system detects a vehicleahead. When a vehicle is detected,the vehicle ahead indicator willdisplay green. Vehicles may not bedetected on curves, highway exitramps, or hills; or due to poorvisibility. FCA will not detect anothervehicle ahead until it is completelyin the driving lane.

{ Warning

FCA does not provide a warningto help avoid a crash, unless itdetects a vehicle. FCA may notdetect a vehicle ahead if the FCAsensor is blocked by dirt, snow,

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

or ice, or if the windshield isdamaged. It may also not detect avehicle on winding or hilly roads,or in conditions that can limitvisibility such as fog, rain,or snow, or if the headlamps orwindshield are not cleaned or inproper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, and FCAsensors clean and in good repair.

Collision Alert

When your vehicle approachesanother detected vehicle too rapidly,the red FCA display will flash on thewindshield. Also, eight rapidhigh-pitched beeps will sound fromthe front. When this Collision Alert

occurs, the brake system mayprepare for driver braking to occurmore rapidly which can cause abrief, mild deceleration. Continue toapply the brake pedal as needed.Cruise control may be disengagedwhen the Collision Alert occurs.

Tailgating Alert

The vehicle ahead indicator willdisplay amber when you arefollowing a detected vehicle aheadmuch too closely.

Selecting the Alert Timing

The Collision Alert control is on thesteering wheel. Press[ to set theFCA timing to Far, Medium, Near,or Off. The first button press showsthe current setting on the Head-UpDisplay (HUD). Additional buttonpresses will change this setting. Thechosen setting will remain until it ischanged and will affect the timing ofboth the Collision Alert and theTailgating Alert features. The timingof both alerts will vary based onvehicle speed. The faster thevehicle speed, the farther away the



alert will occur. Consider traffic andweather conditions when selectingthe alert timing. The range ofselectable alert timing may not beappropriate for all drivers anddriving conditions.

Unnecessary Alerts

FCA may provide unnecessaryalerts for turning vehicles, vehiclesin other lanes, objects that are notvehicles, or shadows. These alertsare normal operation and thevehicle does not need service.

Cleaning the System

If the FCA system does not seem tooperate properly, cleaning theoutside of the windshield in front ofthe camera sensor and the front ofthe vehicle may correct the issue.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, the SBZA system is alane-changing aid that assistsdrivers with avoiding crashes that

occur with vehicles in the side blindzone (or spot) areas. The SBZAwarning display will light up in thecorresponding outside side mirrorand will flash if the turn signal is on.

{ Warning

SBZA does not alert the driver tovehicles rapidly approachingoutside of the side blind zones,pedestrians, bicyclists,or animals. It may not providealerts when changing lanes underall driving conditions. Failure touse proper care when changinglanes may result in injury, death,or vehicle damage. Beforemaking a lane change, alwayscheck mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and use the turnsignals.

SBZA Detection Zones

The SBZA sensor covers a zone ofapproximately one lane over fromboth sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m(11 ft). The height of the zone isapproximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. Thiszone starts at approximately themiddle of the vehicle and goes back5 m (16 ft).

How the System Works

The SBZA symbol lights up in theside mirrors when the systemdetects a vehicle in the next lane



over that is in the side blind zone.This indicates it may be unsafe tochange lanes. Before making a lanechange, check the SBZA display,check mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and use the turn signals.

Left Side MirrorDisplay

Right Side MirrorDisplay

When the vehicle is started, bothoutside mirror SBZA displays willbriefly come on to indicate thesystem is operating. When thevehicle is moving forward, the left-or right-side mirror display will lightup if a vehicle is detected in thatblind zone. If the turn signal isactivated in the same direction of adetected vehicle, this display willflash as an extra warning not tochange lanes.

SBZA can be disabled throughvehicle personalization. See“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-33. If SBZA is disabled bythe driver, the SBZA mirror displayswill not light up.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

SBZA displays may not come onwhen passing a vehicle quickly orwhen towing a trailer. The SBZAdetection zones that extend backfrom the side of the vehicle do notmove further back when a trailer istowed. Use caution while changinglanes when towing a trailer. SBZAmay alert to objects attached to thevehicle, such as a trailer, bicycle,or object extending out to either sideof the vehicle. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice.

SBZA may not always alert thedriver to vehicles in the side blindzone, especially in wet conditions.The system does not need to be

serviced. The system may light updue to guardrails, signs, trees,shrubs, and other non-movingobjects. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice.

SBZA may not operate when theSBZA sensors in the left or rightcorners of the rear bumper arecovered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. Forcleaning instructions, see "Washingthe Vehicle" under Exterior Care onpage 10-72. If the DIC still displaysthe system unavailable messageafter cleaning both sides of thevehicle toward the rear corners ofthe vehicle, see your dealer.

If the SBZA displays do not light upwhen vehicles are in the blind zoneand the system is clean, the systemmay need service. Take the vehicleto your dealer.



When SBZA is disabled for anyreason other than the driver turningit off, the Side Blind Zone Alert Onoption will not be available on thepersonalization menu.

FCC Information


Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may provide awarning if the vehicle is crossing adetected lane without using a turnsignal in the lane departuredirection. LDW uses a camerasensor to detect the lane markings.It only operates at speeds of56 km/h (35 mph) or greater.

When the vehicle crosses adetected lane marking and istraveling greater than 56 km/h(35 mph), the LDW indicator willflash and three beeps will be

sounded from the left or right side,depending on the lane departuredirection. LDW will not warn if theturn signal is on or if a sharpmaneuver is made.

{ Warning

The LDW system is an aid to helpthe vehicle stay in the drivinglane. It does not steer the vehicle.The LDW system may not:

. Provide enough time to avoida crash.

. Detect lane markings underbad weather conditions or ifthe windshield is dirty.

. Detect lane markings and willnot detect road edges.

. Warn that the vehicle iscrossing a lane marking if thesystem does not detect thelane marking.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

If LDW only detects lanemarkings on one side of the road,it will only warn you whendeparting the lane on the sidewhere it has detected a lanemarker. Even with LDW, alwayskeep your attention on the roadand maintain proper vehicleposition within the lane, or vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Always keep thewindshield clean and do not useLDW in bad weather conditions.

How the System Works

The LDW camera sensor is on thewindshield ahead of the rearviewmirror.



To turn LDW on and off, press @ onthe steering wheel. The controlindicator will light when LDW is on.

When the vehicle is started, theLDW indicator on the instrumentcluster will come on briefly.

If LDW is on, the LDW indicator willappear green if the system detectsa left or right lane marking while thevehicle is traveling at 56 km/h(35 mph) or greater. If the vehiclecrosses a detected lane markingwithout using the turn signal in thelane departure direction, thisindicator will change to amber andflash. In addition, three beeps willbe sounded from the left or rightside, depending on the lanedeparture direction.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

If the LDW symbol does not appearwhen the system is on and thevehicle is traveling at least 56 km/h(35 mph):. The lane markings on the road

may not be seen.. The camera sensor may be

blocked by dirt, snow, or ice.. The windshield may be

damaged.

. The weather may be limitingvisibility.

This is normal operation; the vehicledoes not need service. Clean thewindshield.

Lane markings may not be detectedon curves, highway exit ramps,or hills; or due to poor visibility.

If the LDW camera system does notseem to operate properly, cleaningthe outside of the windshield in frontof the camera sensor may correctthe issue.

{ Warning

LDW does not provide a warningto help avoid a crash, unless itdetects the lane markings. LDWmay not detect the lane markingsif the camera sensor is blockedby dirt, snow, or ice, or if thewindshield is damaged. It mayalso not detect a lane on windingor hilly roads, or in conditions that

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

can limit visibility such as fog,rain, or snow, or if the headlampsor windshield are not cleaned orin proper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, andcamera sensors clean and ingood repair.

LDW warnings may occur due to tarmarks, shadows, cracks in the road,or other road imperfections. This isnormal system operation; thevehicle does not need service.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. Whendriving in the U.S., to help keep theengine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, werecommend using TOP TIERDetergent Gasolines. Seewww.toptiergas.com for a list of TOPTIER Detergent Gasolines.

Recommended FuelUse premium unleaded gasolinewith a posted octane rating of 91 orhigher. Regular unleaded gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher can beused, but acceleration could bereduced, and an audible knockingnoise may be heard. If the octane isless than 87, a heavy knockingnoise may be heard. If this occurs,use a gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible.Otherwise, the engine could bedamaged. If heavy knocking isheard when using gasoline with ahigher octane rating, the engineneeds service.

Use of Seasonal Fuels

Use summer and winter fuels in theappropriate season. Driving orstarting could be affected if theincorrect fuel is used. Drive thevehicle with the engine running untilthe fuel is a half tank or less, thenrefuel with the current seasonal fuel.



Prohibited Fuels

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, as wellas reformulated gasolines areavailable in some cities. If thesegasolines comply with thepreviously described specification,then they are acceptable to use.However, E85 and other fuelscontaining more than 15% ethanolmust be used only in FlexFuelvehicles.

{ Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Some gasolines that are notreformulated for low emissions cancontain an octane-enhancingadditive called

methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). Do not usegasolines with MMT as they canreduce spark plug life and affectemission control systemperformance. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, see your dealer for service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meetASTM specification D 4814. Somegasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See “ProhibitedFuels" in Recommended Fuel onpage 9-46.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. See

the underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle may not pass a smog-checktest. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5-12. If this occurs,return to your authorized dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type offuel used, repairs may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf planning to drive in countriesoutside the U.S., the proper fuelmight be hard to find. Checkregional auto club or fuel retailbrand websites for availability in thecountry where driving. Never useleaded gasoline, fuel containingmethanol, or any other fuel not



recommended. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Fuel AdditivesTo keep fuel systems clean, TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline isrecommended. See Fuel onpage 9-46.

If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline isnot available, one bottle of FuelSystem Treatment PLUS, partnumber 88861013, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change, canhelp. Fuel System Treatment PLUSis the only gasoline additiverecommended by General Motors.It is available at your dealer.

Filling the Tank

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on the fuelpump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away from thefuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly andwait for any hiss noise to stopthen unscrew the cap allthe way



The fuel cap is behind a hinged fueldoor on the passenger side of thevehicle. To open the fuel door, pushand release the rearward centeredge of the door.

When reinstalling the cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks, otherwisethe malfunction indicator lamp mayturn on. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5-12.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10-72.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. Make surethe cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5-12.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

{ Caution

If a new fuel cap is needed, besure to get the right type of capfrom your dealer. The wrong typeof fuel cap might not fit properly,might cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to light, and coulddamage the fuel tank andemissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5-12.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

. Place the nozzle inside the fillopening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, and

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

keep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, light matches,or use lighters whilepumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.

Trailer TowingThe vehicle is neither designed norintended to tow a trailer.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work andwould not be covered by thewarranty. Always check with yourdealer before adding electricalequipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-24 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-25.


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-2

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 10-8Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-10Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-16Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-21Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-23

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Windshield Replacement . . . 10-24

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-24High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-25Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-36Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50


10-2 Vehicle Care

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-52Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-68

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-71Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition 65WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride and


Vehicle Care 10-3

handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-25.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13-11.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-24.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11-14.

{ Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.


10-4 Vehicle Care

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull up on the hood releasehandle with this symbol on it.It is located below the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringcolumn.

2. Push up on the secondary hoodrelease and lift the hood.

To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sureall the filler caps are on properly.

2. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 in)above the vehicle and release itso it fully latches. Check tomake sure the hood is closedand repeat the process ifnecessary.


Vehicle Care 10-5

Engine Compartment Overview


10-6 Vehicle Care

1. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10-27.

2. Coolant Recovery Reservoir andDipstick Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 10-11.

3. Engine Oil Dipstick. See EngineOil on page 10-6.

4. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10-6.

5. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10-11.

6. Radiator Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System on page 10-11.

7. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10-69.

8. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brakes onpage 10-18.

9. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-10.

10. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluidon page 10-17.

11. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10-69.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10-8.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a loop.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.


Vehicle Care 10-7

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is at the lower mark at thetip of the dipstick, add 1 L (1 qt) ofthe recommended oil and thenrecheck the level. See “Selectingthe Right Engine Oil” in this sectionfor an explanation of what kind of oil

to use. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2

{ Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oillevels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5

Add enough oil to reach the uppermark on the dipstick. Push thedipstick all the way back in whenthrough.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engine oilswith the dexos1® approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1approved certification mark. Thiscertification mark indicates that theoil has been approved to the dexos1specification.


10-8 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29°C(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may beused. An oil of this viscosity gradewill provide easier cold starting forthe engine at extremely lowtemperatures. When selecting an oilof the appropriate viscosity grade,always select an oil of the correct

specification. See “Specification”earlier in this section for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or rags

containing used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.


Vehicle Care 10-9

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on. SeeEngine Oil Messages on page 5-28.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Display the REMAINING OILLIFE on the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-21.

2. Press and hold the SET/CLRbutton on the DIC while the OilLife display is active. The oil lifewill change to 100%.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:


2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

The system is reset when theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage goes off.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeatthe procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer service department and haveit repaired as soon as possible.

There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid. Because thisprocedure is difficult, you shouldhave this done at your dealerservice department. Contact yourdealer for additional information orthe procedure can be found in theservice manual. To purchase a


10-10 Vehicle Care

service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13-11.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-2, and be sureto use the fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it when required. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-2 for more information.If driving in dusty/dirty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required. Never usecompressed air to clean the filter.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Air Duct Clamp Screw

2. Retaining Clips

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10-4.

2. Disconnect the outlet duct byloosening the screw (1) on theair duct clamp.

3. Remove the retaining clips (2)securing the cover on the aircleaner/filter housing.

4. Pull straight up on the cover;while holding the cover, removethe air filter.

5. Inspect or replace the air filter.See Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 11-13.

6. Reverse Steps 2–5 to reinstallthe cover.

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the engine

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-11

Warning (Continued)

backfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

{ Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.

Cooling System

1. Coolant Recovery Reservoir

2. Engine Cooling Fans (Outof View)

3. Radiator Cap

{ Warning

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not running

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

and can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.


10-12 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner. Any repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000 mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10-16.

What to Use

{ Warning

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

{ Caution

If improper coolant mixture,inhibitors, or additives are used inthe vehicle cooling system, theengine could overheat and bedamaged. Too much water in the

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-13

Caution (Continued)

mixture can freeze and crackengine cooling parts. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Use only theproper mixture of engine coolantfor the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or pouring it intosewers, streams or bodies of water.Have the coolant changed by anauthorized service center, familiarwith legal requirements regardingused coolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

To check coolant:

1. Turn the ignition off.

2. Locate the coolant recoveryreservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5.

3. Turn the coolant recoveryreservoir dipstick capcounterclockwise and slowly pullout the dipstick. There aremaximum and minimummarkings on the dipstick.

4. When the engine is cold, thecoolant level should be at orabove the minimum mark (1).After the vehicle has been drivenand the engine is at normaloperating temperature, the levelshould be somewhere betweenhalf full and the maximummark (2).

5. If the coolant level is correct,replace the coolant recoveryreservoir dipstick cap and turnclockwise to secure.


10-14 Vehicle Care

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Recovery Bottle

{ Warning

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

{ Caution

This vehicle has a specificcoolant fill procedure. Failure tofollow this procedure could causethe engine to overheat and beseverely damaged.

To add coolant:

1. Turn the engine coolant recoveryreservoir dipstick capcounterclockwise 1/8 of a turnand slowly pull out the dipstick.

2. Pour the coolant into the enginecoolant recovery reservoir.

3. When the level is correct, as perthe markings on the dipstick,replace the coolant recoveryreservoir dipstick cap and turnclockwise to secure.

How to Add Coolant to theRadiator

{ Warning

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

{ Caution

This vehicle has a specificcoolant fill procedure. Failure tofollow this procedure could causethe engine to overheat and beseverely damaged.

{ Warning

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They are

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-15

Warning (Continued)

under pressure, and if you turnthe radiator cap— even alittle— they can come out at highspeed. Never turn the cap whenthe cooling system, including theradiator cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling system and radiator capto cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.

If no coolant is visible in the enginecoolant recovery reservoir, addcoolant as follows:

1. Locate the radiator cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5.

2. Cover the radiator cap with athick cloth and turn it slowlycounterclockwise and remove.

3. If there is no coolant visible orthe level is low, slowly fill thesystem through the radiator capopening with a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL coolant until full.

Wait 30 seconds for the coolantto settle and top off if the leveldrops.

Do not spill coolant on theaccessory drive belts.

If a spill occurs, rinse the beltwith fresh water.


5. With the engine idling, top off thecoolant through the radiator capopening until full.

Wait 30 seconds for the coolantto settle and top off if the leveldrops.

6. Once the system is full, put theradiator cap back on by turningclockwise.

7. Turn the engine off.

8. Check the coolant level in theengine coolant recoveryreservoir and fill it until the levelis at the top mark on the dipstickcap. Filling to this level providesadditional coolant to allow forany air that may be left in thecooling system.


10-16 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has an indicator to warnof engine overheating.

There is an engine coolanttemperature gauge on your vehicle'sinstrument panel. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5-9.

You may decide not to lift the hoodwhen this warning appears, butinstead get service help right away.See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13-5.

If you do decide to lift the hood,make sure the vehicle is parked ona level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

{ Caution

Running the engine withoutcoolant may cause damage or afire. Vehicle damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.


Vehicle Care 10-17

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral), and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gauge isno longer in the overheat zone or anoverheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normallyand have the cooling systemchecked for proper fill and function.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid isneeded, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe windshield washer fluid reservoiris full. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10-5 for reservoirlocation.

{ Caution

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

(Continued)


10-18 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs,which could damage the tankif it is completely full.

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time when the vehicleis moving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead to

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

a crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

{ Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2.

Brake pads should be replaced ascomplete sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,


Vehicle Care 10-19

installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 4 brake fluid.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5-14.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 4 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. It isrecommended that the brakehydraulic system be flushed andrefilled with new DOT 4 fluid at aregular maintenance service everytwo years. See MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-2 andRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.


10-20 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

{ Caution

. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system can damagebrake hydraulic system partsso badly that they will have tobe replaced. Do not letsomeone put in the wrongkind of fluid.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryThe battery is in the trunk, behind atrim panel, on the driver side of thevehicle. Refer to the replacementnumber shown on the originalbattery label when a new battery isneeded.

{ Warning

A specifically developed batterywith a ventilation system isrequired for this vehicle. Any

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

other standard battery may causeexplosive gases to enter the trunkor passenger compartment.

Do not remove the caps on thetop of the battery. The batterysupplied in the vehicle ismaintenance free and does notrequire checking or filling.

The battery vent tube must beinstalled correctly to ensure theexplosive gases are ventedoutside the vehicle.

Only use a manufacturerrecommended battery as areplacement.

{ Warning

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicals

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-21

Warning (Continued)

known to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10-69 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Rear Axle

When to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck rear axle fluid unless yoususpect there is a leak or you hearan unusual noise. A fluid loss couldindicate a problem. Have itinspected and repaired.

How to Check Lubricant

1. Fill Plug Hole

2. Drain Plug Hole

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

If the level is below the bottom ofthe filler plug hole, add somelubricant. Add enough lubricant toraise the level to the bottom of thefiller plug hole.

What to Use

To add lubricant when the level islow or to completely refill afterdraining, see Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11-12. Thenfill to the bottom of the fill plug holewith the required lubricant.

Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.


10-22 Vehicle Care

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Apply both the parking brakeand the regular brake.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Apply the parking brake. Beready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle beginsto move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) with

normal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckIf equipped with a key type ignition,while parked and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.


Vehicle Care 10-23

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade Replacement

Front Wiper Blade

Windshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-2.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For the proper typeand size, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11-13.

To replace the wiper bladeassembly:

1. Pull the windshield wiperassembly away from thewindshield.

2. Squeeze the tabs on each sideof the wiper blade assembly andslide the assembly off the end ofthe wiper arm.

3. Install the new blade onto thearm connector and make surethe tabs are fully set in thelocked position.

Allowing the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would not


10-24 Vehicle Care

be covered by your warranty. Donot allow the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield.

4. Repeat the steps for the otherblade.

Windshield ReplacementThe windshield is part of the HUDsystem. If the vehicle has to havethe windshield replaced, get onethat is designed for HUD or theHUD image may look out of focus.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10-25.

For any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting

{ Warning

The high intensity dischargelighting system operates at a veryhigh voltage. If you try to serviceany of the system components,you could be seriously injured.Have your dealer or a qualifiedtechnician service them.

After an HID headlamp bulb hasbeen replaced, the beam might be aslightly different shade than it wasoriginally. This is normal.


Vehicle Care 10-25

License Plate Lamp

Lamp Assembly

Bulb Assembly

1. Bulb Socket

2. Bulb

3. Lamp Assembly

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Push the left end of the lampassembly toward the right.

2. Turn the lamp assembly down toremove it.

3. Turn the bulb socket (1)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (3).

4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out ofthe bulb socket (1).

5. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socket andturn the bulb socket clockwise toinstall it into the lamp assembly.

6. Turn the lamp assembly into thelamp assembly openingengaging the clip side first.

7. Push on the lamp side oppositethe clip until the lamp assemblysnaps into place.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

LicensePlate Lamp

W5W

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.


10-26 Vehicle Care

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

FusesThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits byfuses. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electricalproblems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon asyou can.

Spare fuses of various ratings areprovided in the EngineCompartment Fuse Block and RearCompartment Fuse Block.


Vehicle Care 10-27

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

To access the fuse block, removethe clip-on cover.

Ensure the cover is replacedsecurely.


10-28 Vehicle Care

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

F1 Heated Mirrors

F2 Not Used

F3 Rear Defogger

F4 Not Used

F5 Spot Lamp Right

F6 Driver Power Seat

F7 Washer Pump

F8 PassengerPower Seat

F9 EMER/ VEH/FT/LP

F10 Not Used

F11 Driving Lamps

F12 Headlamp Washer

F13 Spot Lamp Left

F14 ABS Pump

F15 ABS Valves

Fuses Usage

F16 Not Used

F17 Not Used

F18 Heated Front Seats

F19 Not Used

F20 Not Used

F21 Front PassengerWindow Switch

F22 Rear Wiper

F23 Sunroof

F24 Front Wipers

F25 Automatic OccupantSensing/InstrumentCluster Ignition

F26 LRBEC Ignition

F27 Not Used

F28 Ignition/InjectorsEven-V8

F29 Engine ControlModule-V8, IgnitionOdd-V6/EMIS

Fuses Usage

F30 Not Used

F31 Not Used

F32 Fog Lamps

F33 Ignition-IP/BODY

F34 Fuel System ControlModule

F35 Not Used

F36 ESCL

F37 EMIS 2/IgnitionEven-V6

F38 Engine ControlModule-V6, Injectors/Ignition Odd-V8

F39 INCLR Pump

F40 Not Used

F41 Transmission ControlModule/ElectricPower Steering

F42 Starter Motor

F43 Not Used


Vehicle Care 10-29

Fuses Usage

F44 Left HID Headlamp

F45 Right HID Headlamp

F46 Left & RightHigh-Beam Headlamp

F47 Horn

F48 Engine Cooling Fan

F49 Automatic HeadlampLeveling

F50 Transmission ControlModule Ignition

F51 Engine ControlModule Ignition

F52 Brake Vacuum Pump

F53 Air ConditioningCompressor Clutch

F54 Vaporizer ControlModule

Relays

Relays Usage

R1 Driving Lamps

Relays Usage

R2 Headlamp Washer

R3 Rear Washer Pump

R4 Front Washer Pump

R5 Rear Defogger

R6 Front Wiper Control

R7 Wiper Speed

R8 Engine ControlModule

R9 Not Used

R10 INCLR Pump

R11 Not Used

R12 Rear Wiper Control

R13 Fog Lamps

R14 Low-BeamHeadlamps

R15 High-BeamHeadlamps

R16 Starter

R17 Run/Crank

Relays Usage

R18 Brake Vacuum Pump

R19 Air ConditioningControl

R20 Horn

Relays R3, R4, R12, R13, and R20are PCB mounted relays.

Instrument Panel FuseBlock


10-30 Vehicle Care

Removing the Fuse Panel Cover

Insert a screwdriver in the slotindicated and remove the fuse panelcover.

Refitting the Fuse Panel Cover

1. Insert the rear edge of the fusepanel cover under the door seal.

2. Locate the hooks on the coverinto the end of the instrumentpanel.

3. Rotate and push the cover backinto position.


Vehicle Care 10-31


Fuses

Fuses Usage

F1 Body ControlModule 1

F2 Diagnostic LinkConnector

F3 LPG Shut-OffSolenoid


F5 Ignition Switch

F6 Electric SteeringControl Lock

CB7 Not Used

F8 Not Used

F9 Not Used

F10 Not Used

F11 Shunt 1

Fuses Usage

F12 Airbag/AutomaticOccupant Sensing

F13 Instrument Cluster

F14 HVAC Control Module

F15 Rain Sensor


F17 LPG Shut-OffSolenoid

F18 Not Used

F19 SWC Backlight

F20 Not Used

F21 Not Used

F22 Shunt 2




Fuses Usage

CB26 Not Used


F28 Blower Fan

F29 Accessories


Relays

Relays Usage

R1 Logistics

R2 LPG Shut-OffSolenoid

R3 LPG Shut-OffSolenoid


10-32 Vehicle Care

Rear Compartment FuseBlockThe fuse panel is on the left side ofthe trunk, above the battery.

. Turn the catch counterclockwiseto unlatch the cover.

. To refit, replace the cover andturn the catch clockwise tosecure.


Vehicle Care 10-33


Fuses

Fuses Usage

F1 Driver Front/Left RearWindow

F2 EMER/VEH/ACCY

F3 Trunk Release

F4 Passive EntryPassive Start-BATT 2

F5 Radio

F6 Not Used

F7 Not Used

F8 Fuel System ControlModule

F9 MRTD

F10 Decklid FlashingLamps/EDI Module

F11 Auxiliary Battery

F12 Not Used

Fuses Usage

F13 Not Used

F14 Rear SeatEntertainment

F15 Automatic HeadlampLeveling

F16 Not Used

F17 Not Used

F18 OnStar

F19 Mirror/WindowModule

F20 Canister VentSolenoid

F21 Passive EntryPassive Start-BATT 1

F22 Memory Seat Module

F23 Amplifier

F24 Passenger Front/Right Rear Window

F25 Electric Parking Brake

F26 Tailgate Module

Fuses Usage

F27 Camera Ignition

F28 Front Vent SeatIgnition

F29 Trailer Module Ignition

F30 Advanced ParkAssist/Side BlindZone Alert

F31 Engine ControlModule

F32 Auxiliary Gauges

F33 Retained AccessoryPower

F34 Battery VoltageSensing

F35 Tailgate Motor

F36 Rear AccessoryPower Outlet

F37 Interior AccessoryPower Outlet

F38 Cigar Lighter

F39 Not Used


10-34 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

F40 Trailer Module

Relays

Relays Usage

R1 Trunk Release

R2 Accessory

R3 Not Used

R4 Run

R5 Not Used

R6 Retained AccessoryPower

R7 Logistics Mode

R8 Not Used

R9 Not Used

R10 Not Used

R11 Child Locks

Relays R1, R2, R3, and R5 are PCBmounted relays.

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowout

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

and a serious crash. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-35

Warning (Continued)

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If the treadis badly worn,replace them.

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on ice or snow coveredroads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires onpage 10-49.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Low-Profile Tires

{ Caution

Low-profile tires are moresusceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact thanstandard profile tires. Tire and/orwheel assembly damage canoccur when coming into contactwith road hazards like potholes,or sharp edged objects, or whensliding into a curb. The warrantydoes not cover this type of

(Continued)


10-36 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

damage. Keep tires set to thecorrect inflation pressure andwhen possible, avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and other roadhazards.

Summer TiresUltra High Performance SummerTires

This vehicle may come with245/40R19 and 275/35R19 ultrahigh performance summer tires.These tires have a special tread andcompound that are optimized formaximum dry and wet roadperformance. This special tread andcompound will have decreasedperformance in cold climates, andon ice and snow. Driving a vehiclewith ultra high performance summertires when temperatures are belowapproximately 5°C (40°F) is notrecommended. If driving in these

conditions, winter tires should beinstalled. See Winter Tires onpage 10-35.

{ Caution

Ultra high performance summertires have rubber compounds thatlose flexibility and may developsurface cracks in the tread areaat temperatures below -7°C(20°F). Always store ultra highperformance summer tiresindoors and at temperaturesabove -7°C (20°F) when not inuse. If the tires have beensubjected to -7°C (20°F) or less,let them warm up in a heatedspace to at least 5°C (40°F) for24 hours or more before beinginstalled or driving a vehicle onwhich they are installed. Do notapply heat or blow heated airdirectly on the tires. Alwaysinspect tires before use. See TireInspection on page 10-46.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(1) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.


Vehicle Care 10-37

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture: The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the third

week of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperature

resistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10-51.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character in


10-38 Vehicle Care

the tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem 3 of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are

automatic transmission, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)


Vehicle Care 10-39

before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10-41.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-10.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-10.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that faces


10-40 Vehicle Care

outward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10-41 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the tread

of a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10-48.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10-51.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-10.


Vehicle Care 10-41

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-10.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

{ Caution

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:

. Unusual wear.

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-10. Howthe vehicle is loaded affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a monthor more.


10-42 Vehicle Care

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check the tirepressure. Proper tire inflationcannot be determined by lookingat the tire. Check the tireinflation pressure when the tiresare cold, meaning the vehiclehas not been driven for at leastthree hours or no more than1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget the pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.

If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure in high, presson the metal stem in the center

of the tire valve to release air.Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to keep out dirt andmoisture and prevent leaks.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or

tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation has


Vehicle Care 10-43

not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to

ensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-43.


Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, including the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

The full-size spare includes asensor for the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS). The TPMS will not

monitor or display the spare tire airpressure until the tire/wheel isinstalled at one of the four tire/wheelpositions on the vehicle andmatched to the new position.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-10.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire may display in theDriver Information Center (DIC). Thelow tire pressure warning light andthe DIC warning message,if equipped, come on at each


10-44 Vehicle Care

ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, it may bepossible to view the tire pressurelevels. For additional informationand details about the DIC operationand displays, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-21.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-10, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10-41.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition, but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10-46, Tire Rotation onpage 10-47, and Tires onpage 10-34.

{ Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kitsuse a GM approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TPMSsensors. See Tire Sealant and

Compressor Kit on page 10-56 forinformation regarding the inflator kitmaterials and instructions.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning light,defined above, flashes for aboutone minute and then stays on forthe remainder of the ignition cycle.A DIC warning message may alsodisplay. The malfunction light andDIC warning message, if equipped,come on at each ignition cycle untilthe problem is corrected. Some ofthe conditions that can cause theseto come on are:. The TPMS sensor matching

process was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires or exchanging aroad tire with the spare tire. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage, if equipped, should go


Vehicle Care 10-45

off after successfully completingthe sensor matching process.See "TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage, if equipped, should gooff when the TPMS sensors areinstalled and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealer forservice.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10-49.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message, if equipped,come on and stay on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. Also,the TPMS sensor matching processshould be performed after replacinga spare tire with a road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage, if equipped, should go offat the next ignition cycle. Thesensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions, using a TPMSrelearn tool, in the following order:left front tire, right front tire, right

rear tire, and left rear tire. See yourdealer for service or to purchase arelearn tool.

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.


3. Use the MENU button to selectthe Vehicle Information Menu inthe Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll tothe Tire Pressure Menu Itemscreen.


10-46 Vehicle Care

5. Press and hold the SET/CLRbutton to begin the sensormatching process.

A message requestingacceptance of the process maydisplay.

6. If requested, press the SET/CLRbutton again to confirm theselection.

The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand the TIRE LEARN or TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

7. Start with the left front tire.

8. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

9. Proceed to the right front tire,and repeat the procedure inStep 8.

10. Proceed to the right rear tire,and repeat the procedure inStep 8.

11. Proceed to the left rear tire,and repeat the procedure inStep 8. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the left rear tire,and the TPMS sensor matchingprocess is no longer active.The TIRE LEARN or TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messageon the DIC display screengoes off.

12. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

13. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.


Vehicle Care 10-47

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationThe tires should be rotatedevery 12 000 km/7,500 mi. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-2.

Tires are rotated to achieveuniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheel

alignment. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 10-48and Wheel Replacement onpage 10-52.

Different tire sizes should not berotated front to rear.

Use this rotation pattern if thevehicle has different size tireson the front and rear.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire and

Loading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure on page 10-41and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10-43.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12-2.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where the

(Continued)


10-48 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

wheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10-46 and TireRotation on page 10-47.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare if

equipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacturer date is the lastfour digits of the DOT TireIdentification Number (TIN) which ismolded into one side of the tiresidewall. The first two digitsrepresent the week (01–52) and thelast two digits, the year. Forexample, the third week of the year2010 would have a four-digit DOTdate of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle for


Vehicle Care 10-49

at least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Spec

number is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10-36, foradditional information.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time.If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation on page 10-47 forinformation on proper tirerotation. However, if it is

necessary to replace only oneaxle set of worn tires, place thenew tires on the rear axle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, and ZR speed rated tires.Never exceed the winter tire'smaximum speed capability whenusing winter tires with a lowerspeed rating.

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.


10-50 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes(other than those originallyinstalled on the vehicle), brands,or types may cause loss ofcontrol of the vehicle, resulting ina crash or other vehicle damage.Use the correct size, brand, andtype of tire on all four wheels.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-43.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-10, for the labellocation and more informationabout the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GM

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-51

Warning (Continued)

specific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10-49 and Accessories andModifications on page 10-2.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.


10-52 Vehicle Care

Traction

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled

conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingare not necessary on a regularbasis. Consider an alignment checkif there is unusual tire wear or thevehicle is significantly pulling to oneside or the other. Some slight pull tothe left or right, depending on thecrown of the road and/or other roadsurface variations such as troughsor ruts, is normal. If the vehicle isvibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.


Vehicle Care 10-53

If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causing

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

a crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

{ Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicleground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ Warning

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss of

(Continued)


10-54 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

control and a crash. Use anothertype of traction device only if itsmanufacturer recommends it forthe vehicle's tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, driveslowly and readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the rear tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. See Tireson page 10-34. If air goes out of atire, it is much more likely to leakout slowly. But if there is ever ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only for

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-55

Warning (Continued)

changing a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6-3.

{ Warning

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.

This vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. To use the jackingequipment to change a spare tiresafely, follow the instructions below.

Then see Tire Changing onpage 10-63. To use the tire sealantand compressor kit, see TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10-56.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (1).

1. Wheel Block

2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.


10-56 Vehicle Care

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

{ Warning

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9-21.

{ Warning

Overinflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the tire sealant

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

and compressor kit instructionsand inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do notexceed the recommendedpressure.

{ Warning

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store the tiresealant and compressor kit in itsoriginal location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire, tire changing equipment,and on some vehicles there may notbe a place to store a tire.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to 6 mm (0.25 inch) inthe tread area of the tire. It can alsobe used to inflate an underinflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 13-5.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.


Vehicle Care 10-57

The kit includes:

1. On/Off Switch

2. Pressure Gauge

3. Tire Sealant Canister

4. Air Only Hose

5. Sealant/Air Hose

6. Power Plug

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe sealant canister.

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister. Thesealant canister should be replacedbefore its expiration date.Replacement sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the sealantcanister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit to TemporarilySeal and Inflate a Punctured Tire

When using the tire sealant andcompressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in aheated environment for five minutes.This will help to inflate the tirefaster.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6-3.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10-54 for other importantsafety warnings.

Do not remove any objects thathave penetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10-62.

2. Remove the sealant/air hose (5)from the side of the compressor.

3. Remove the power plug (6).

4. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

5. Remove the valve stem cap fromthe flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.


10-58 Vehicle Care

6. Attach the sealant/air hose (5)onto the tire valve. Turn itclockwise until it is tight.

7. Switch the on/off switch (1) tothe O position.

8. Plug the power plug (6) into thepower outlet in the vehicle.Unplug all items from otheraccessory power outlets. SeePower Outlets on page 5-4.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

9. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

10. Switch the on/off switch (1) tothe I position.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.

Sealant may leak from thepuncture hole until the vehicleis driven and the hole hassealed.

The pressure gauge (2) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushesthe sealant into the tire. Oncethe sealant is completelydispersed into the tire, thepressure will quickly drop andstart to rise again as the tireinflates with air only.

11. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (2). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10-41.

The pressure gauge (2) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate pressure

reading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.

{ Caution

If the recommended pressurecannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideAssistance Program onpage 13-5.


Vehicle Care 10-59


The tire is not sealed and willcontinue to leak air until thevehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire.Therefore, Steps 13–19 mustbe done immediately afterStep 12.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

13. Unplug the power plug (6) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

14. Turn the sealant/air hose (5)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

15. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

16. Replace the sealant/airhose (5), and the power plug (6back in their original location.

17. If the flat tire was able to inflateto the recommended inflationpressure, remove themaximum speed label from thetire sealant canister (3) andplace it in a highly visiblelocation.

Do not exceed the speed onthis label until the damaged tireis repaired or replaced.

18. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

19. Immediately drive the vehicle8 km (5 mi) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

20. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure. Referto Steps 1–10 under “Using theTire Sealant and CompressorKit without Sealant to Inflate aTire (Not Punctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 68 kPa (10 psi)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stop drivingthe vehicle. The tire is tooseverely damaged and the tiresealant cannot seal the tire.See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 13-5.

If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 68 kPa(10 psi) from the recommendedinflation pressure, inflate thetire to the recommendedinflation pressure.

21. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire or vehicle.

22. Dispose of the used tiresealant canister (3) andsealant/air hose (5) assembly


10-60 Vehicle Care

at a local dealer or inaccordance with local statecodes and practices.

23. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from your dealer.

24. After temporarily sealing a tireusing the tire sealant andcompressor kit, take thevehicle to an authorized dealerwithin 161 km (100 mi) ofdriving to have the tire repairedor replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit without Sealant toInflate a Tire (Not Punctured)

To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:

1. On/Off Switch

2. Pressure Gauge

3. Tire Sealant Canister

4. Air Only Hose

5. Sealant/Air Hose

6. Power Plug

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6-3.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10-54 for other importantsafety warnings.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10-62.

2. Lift the lever and pull the air onlyhose (4) from the bottom of thetire sealant and compressor kit.

3. Remove the power plug (6) fromthe air compressor.

4. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

5. Remove the tire valve stem capby turning it counterclockwise.


Vehicle Care 10-61

6. Attach the air only hose (4) ontothe tire valve stem and press thelever down to secure it.

7. Plug the power plug (6) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5-4.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

8. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

9. Switch the on/off switch (1) tothe I position.

The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (2). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10-41.

The pressure gauge (2) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate reading. Thecompressor may be turned on/off until the correct pressure isreached.


Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (6) andthe air only hose (4).

13. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

14. Place the equipment in theoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister

After repairing a tire, replace the tiresealant canister.

To remove the sealant canister:

1. Unlock the air only hose (4) fromthe tire sealant canister (3) bypulling up on the lever.

2. Pull the air only hose (4) fromthe tire sealant canister (3).

3. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (5)from the air compressor.


10-62 Vehicle Care

4. Turn the sealant canister (3)counterclockwise so the sealant/air hose (5) is aligned with theslot in the compressor.

5. Lift the tire sealant canister (3)from the compressor andreplace with a new tire sealantcanister. See your dealer formore information.

6. Dispose of the tire sealantcanister at your dealer or inaccordance with local or Statecodes and practices.

To install a new sealant canister:

1. Align the sealant/air hose (5)with the slot in the compressor.

2. Push the tire sealant canister (3)down and turn it clockwise.

3. Wrap the sealant/air hose (5)around the air compressorchannel to stow it in its originallocation.

4. Push the air only hose (4) ontothe tire sealant canister (3) inletand push the lever down.

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit

The tire sealant and air compressorkit is located in a foam container inthe trunk, under the floor carpet.


Vehicle Care 10-63

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

To access the spare tire and tools:

1. Jack

2. Wheel Wrench

1. Open the trunk.

2. Lift the cover with the handle/strap and attach the hook to thetrunk lid.

3. Turn the retainer nutcounterclockwise to remove it.

4. Place the spare tire next to thetire being changed.


10-64 Vehicle Care

5. The vehicle may have a secondretainer nut and panel.

To access the tools, remove thesecond retainer nut and panel.

6. Remove the tools and placethem near the tire beingchanged.

Remove the tool container fromthe vehicle, if necessary.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10-54.

2. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen allthe wheel nuts.

Do not remove the wheel nuts.

3. Place the jack near the flat tire.

4. Place the spare tire near you.

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-65

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

5. Unfold the wheel wrench so itforms a right angle.

6. Slide the wheel wrench onto thedrive nut of the jack.

{ Caution

Make sure that the jack lift headis in the correct position or youmay damage your vehicle. Therepairs would not be covered byyour warranty.

7. Position the jack lift head at thejack location nearest the flat tire.The locations are identified bycutouts in the underside of thedoor sill. The jack must not beused in any other position.


10-66 Vehicle Care

8. Raise the vehicle by turning thejack handle clockwise. Raise thevehicle far enough off theground so there is enough roomfor the road tire to clear theground.

9. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

10. Remove the flat tire.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. In

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

an emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

11. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

12. Place the spare tire on thewheel-mounting surface.


Vehicle Care 10-67

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

13. Reinstall the wheel nuts.Tighten each nut by hand untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

14. Lower the vehicle by turningthe jack handlecounterclockwise.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

aftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

{ Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensivebrake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the propersequence and to the propertorque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications forthe wheel nut torque specification.

15. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

16. Lower the jack all the way andremove the jack from under thevehicle.

17. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlywith the wheel wrench.


10-68 Vehicle Care

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

Replace the jack, tools, containerand flat tire in the trunk by reversingthe steps used to remove them.

Full-Size Spare TireIf this vehicle came with a full-sizespare tire, it was fully inflated whennew, however, it can lose air overtime. Check the inflation pressureregularly. See Tire Pressure onpage 10-41 and Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-10 for informationregarding proper tire inflation andloading the vehicle. For instructions

on how to remove, install, or store aspare tire, see Tire Changing onpage 10-63.

After installing the spare tire on thevehicle, stop as soon as possibleand check that the spare is correctlyinflated. The spare tire is made toperform well at speeds up to112 km/h (70 mph) at therecommended inflation pressure, soyou can finish your trip.

The full-size spare includes a TPMSsensor. The TPMS will not monitoror display the spare tire air pressureuntil the tire/wheel is installed at oneof the four tire/wheel positions onthe vehicle and matched to the newposition. See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-43 forinformation about matching thespare tire to the TPMS.

Have the damaged or flat road tirerepaired or replaced and installedback onto the vehicle as soon aspossible so the spare tire will beavailable in case it is needed again.

Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they will notfit. Keep the spare tire and its wheeltogether.


Vehicle Care 10-69

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10-20.

If the battery has run down, try touse another vehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle.Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

{ Caution

Ignoring these steps could resultin costly damage to the vehiclethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Trying to startthe vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damagethe vehicle.

1. Jump Start Positive Post

2. Jump Start Negative Post

The jump start positive (1) andnegative (2) posts are in the enginecompartment on the driver side ofthe vehicle.

These posts are used instead of adirect connection to the battery.

The positive jump start connectionis covered by a red cap. Remove toexpose the terminal.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

{ Caution

If the other vehicle does not havea 12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. Position the two vehicles so thatthey are not touching.


10-70 Vehicle Care

3. Set the parking brake firmly andput the shift lever in P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9-18.

{ Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible, turnoff or unplug all accessories oneither vehicle when jump starting.

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFand switch off all lights andaccessories in both vehicles,except the hazard warningflashers if needed.

{ Warning

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Connect one end of the redpositive (+) cable to the jumpstart remote positive (+) post (1)of the discharged battery.


Vehicle Care 10-71

6. Connect the other end of the redpositive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery.

7. Connect one end of the blacknegative (–) cable to thenegative (–) terminal of the goodbattery.

8. Connect the other end of theblack negative (–) cable to theremote negative (–) post (2).

9. Start the engine in the vehiclewith the good battery and runthe engine at idle speed for atleast four minutes.

10. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

{ Caution

If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables donot touch each other or othermetal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables

Towing the Vehicle

{ Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not lashor hook to the chassiscomponents — including the frontand rear subframes, suspensioncontrol arms, and links — duringtowing and recovery of a disabledvehicle, or when securing thevehicle. Use the proper nylonstrap harnesses around the tiresto secure the vehicle.

Have the vehicle towed on a flatbedcar carrier. A wheel lift tow truckcould damage the vehicle.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.


10-72 Vehicle Care

There are 2 oval-shaped slots (1)under the front of the vehicle thatshould be used to move a disabledvehicle. Use only these slots tohook to the vehicle. The slots canbe accessed through the splashshield. Use an appropriate size Thook for the slot.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing”following.

Recreational VehicleTowing

{ Caution

Dolly towing or dinghy towing thevehicle may cause damagebecause of reduced groundclearance. Always put the vehicleon a flatbed truck or trailer.

The vehicle was neither designednor intended to be towed with any ofits wheels on the ground. If thevehicle must be towed, see Towingthe Vehicle on page 10-71.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

{ Caution

Do not use petroleum-based,acidic, or abrasive cleaningagents as they can damage thevehicle's paint, metal, or plasticparts. If damage occurs, it wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Approved cleaning

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-73

Caution (Continued)

products can be obtained fromyour dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions, andappropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

{ Caution

Avoid using high-pressurewashes closer than 30 cm (12 in)to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can resultin damage or removal of paintand decals.

This symbole is on anyunderhood compartment electricalcenter that should not be power

washed. This could cause damagethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

If using an automatic car wash,follow the car wash instructions. Thewindshield wiper and rear windowwiper, if equipped, must be off.Remove any accessories that maybe damaged or interfere with the carwash equipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such as

calcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

{ Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish

(Continued)


10-74 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

may damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

{ Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can resultin a hazy white finish or pitting.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum. To preventdamage always follow thesecleaning instructions:. Be sure the molding is cool to

the touch before applying anycleaning solution.

. Use a cleaning solutionapproved for aluminum. Somecleaners are highly acidic orcontain alkaline substances andcan damage the moldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use chrome cleaners.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals andStripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses andemblems, decals and stripes. Followinstructions under "Washing theVehicle" previously in this section.

Lamp covers are made of plastic,and some have a UV protectivecoating.

Use only lukewarm water, a softcloth, and mild car washing soap toclean exterior lamps and lenses. Donot clean or wipe them while theyare dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:. Abrasive or caustic agents.. Washer fluids and other cleaning

agents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.


Vehicle Care 10-75

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,or other harsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessiveheat generated.

{ Caution

Failure to clean lamps properlycan cause damage to the lampcover that would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Using wax on low gloss blackfinish stripes can increase thegloss level and create anon-uniform finish. Clean lowgloss stripes with soap andwater only.

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshield,when washing the vehicle.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply Dielectric silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or

squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climatesmay require more frequentapplication. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfacescan be removed by rubbing with aclean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11-12.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

{ Caution

Using petroleum-based tiredressing products on the vehiclemay damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off anyoverspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.


10-76 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

{ Caution

Chrome wheels and other chrometrim may be damaged if thevehicle is not washed after drivingon roads that have been sprayedwith magnesium, calcium,or sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

{ Caution

To avoid surface damage, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners,brushes, or cleaners that containacid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Door Drain Holes

. Clear dirt and other foreignmaterials from the drain holes atthe bottom of the door panelswhich could trap water inside thepanels.

. Clean clogged drain holes.

. Avoid scratching the finish.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose or


Vehicle Care 10-77

missing parts or signs of wear atleast once a year. Inspect the powersteering for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visuallycheck constant velocity joint, bootsand axle seals for leaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and thesteel fuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, Spring andFall, use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregular

dark spots etched into the paintsurface. Refer to “Finish Care”previously in this section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. Apply allcleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners directly


10-78 Vehicle Care

on any switches or controls.Cleaners should be removedquickly. Never allow cleaners toremain on the surface beingcleaned for extended periodsof time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.8 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

{ Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six monthsof ownership will reduce tendencyto fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with justwater and mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.. When lightly soiled, wipe with a

sponge or soft lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.


Vehicle Care 10-79

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth is recommendedto prevent lint transfer to thefabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth toa clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

For vehicles with high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays, use amicrofiber cloth to wipe surfaces.Before wiping the surface with themicrofiber cloth, use a soft bristlebrush to remove dirt that couldscratch the surface. Then use themicrofiber cloth by gently rubbing toclean. Never use window cleanersor solvents. Periodically hand washthe microfiber cloth separately,using mild soap. Do not use bleachor fabric softener. Rinse thoroughlyand air dry before next use.

{ Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and wouldnot be covered by the warranty.


10-80 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,Low Gloss Paint Surfaces andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

{ Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, aswell as other interior surfaces,may cause permanent damage.Wipe excess moisture from thesesurfaces after cleaning and allowthem to dry naturally. Never useheat, steam, spot lifters, or spotremovers. Do not use cleanersthat contain silicone or wax-basedproducts. Cleaners containing

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

these solvents can permanentlychange the appearance and feelof leather or soft trim and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

{ Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plasticsand painted surfaces. If an airfreshener comes in contact withany plastic or painted surface inthe vehicle, blot immediately andclean with a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.Damage caused by air freshenerswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

Wash with warm water and milddetergent. Do not use chlorinebleach. Rinse with cold water, andthen dry completely.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.


Vehicle Care 10-81

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage (if equipped):. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals. Alwayscheck that the floor mats do notinterfere with the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

Pull up on the rear of the floor matto unlock each retainer and remove.

Reinstall by lining up the floor matretainer openings over the carpetretainers and snap into position.

Make sure the floor mat is properlysecured in place.

Verify the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.


10-82 Vehicle Care

2 NOTES


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Recommended FluidsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-14

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trained

technicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

{ Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services.Normal vehicle maintenance is forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-10.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel onpage 9-46.

The Additional Required Services -Severe are for vehicles that are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic

in hot weather.. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.. Frequently towing a trailer.

. Used for high speed orcompetitive driving.

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Severe chart.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10-3.

MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10-6.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10-41.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10-46.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-17.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle service



for more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-8.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10-47.. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10-6 and Engine OilLife System on page 10-8.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10-12.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-17.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10-72. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10-23.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10-41.

. Check spare wheel retainer.If loose, tighten with a torquewrench to 4.5 +/− 0.5Y.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10-46.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-10.

. Inspect brake system.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10-72.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3-12.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10-72.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10-21.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10-22.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10-22.



. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10-23.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid. Changefilter if serviceable. @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @

Replace rear axle fluid. @ @ @

Replace brake fluid. (6) @ @ @ @ @



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10-11.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(6) Or every two years, whichevercomes first.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Severe

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid. Changefilter if serviceable. @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @

Replace rear axle fluid. @ @ @

Replace brake fluid. (6) @ @ @ @ @



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10-11.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(6) Or every two years, whichevercomes first.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See "UnderbodyMaintenance" in Exterior Careon page 10-72.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.



Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.. To avoid break-down or failure to

start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if they

squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.



Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through the

rubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10-77 and Exterior Care onpage 10-72.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.



Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1® specification of the properSAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is recommended.See Engine Oil on page 10-6.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10-12.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 4 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299570).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Rear Axle Castrol SAF Carbon Modified SAE 75W/85 API GL5 Differential Oil (GMPart No. 92184900).

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241).

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668) or lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770) or Dielectric SiliconeGrease (GM Part No. 12345579).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Numbers ACDelco Part Numbers

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 92066873 A3149C

Engine Oil Filter 89017524 PF48

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 92184248 CF182

Spark Plugs 12621258 41-110

Wiper Blades

Driver Side 92219233 —

Passenger Side 92219234 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



DateOdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12-2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the rear load floor,behind the spare tire tub, has thefollowing information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargetype and amount, see the refrigerant label underthe hood. See your dealer for more information.

Engine Cooling System 10.5 L 11.0 qt

Engine Oil with Filter 7.6 L 8.0 qt

Fuel Tank 71 L 19 gal

Rear Axle Fluid 1.25 L 1.3 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.


Technical Data 12-3

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

6.2L V8 (LS3) W Automatic 0.95–1.10 mm(0.037–0.043 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing


12-4 Technical Data

2 NOTES


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-11

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-15Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-222-1020. InCanada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesChevrolet encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170www.Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-243-8872

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994



Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, MailCode: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its Customer

Assistance Center. Any TTY user inthe U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-2438. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.chevrolet.com

The Chevrolet online ownerexperience is a one-stop resourcethat allows interaction withChevrolet and keeps importantvehicle-specific information in oneplace.

Membership Benefits

E (Vehicle Information):Download owner manuals and viewvehicle-specific how-to videos.

G (Maintenance Information):View maintenance schedules,required alerts, OnStar onboardvehicle diagnostic information, andschedule service appointments.

I (Service History): Viewprintable dealer-recorded servicerecords and self-recorded servicerecords.

D (Preferred DealerInformation): Select a preferreddealer and view dealer location,maps, phone numbers, and hours.

J (Warranty TrackingInformation): Track the vehicle’swarranty information.

J (Recall Information): Viewactive recalls or search by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)on page 12-1.

H (Other Account Information):View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio, and OnStar accountinformation.

F (Live Chat Support): Chat livewith online help representatives.

Visit my.chevrolet.com to registeryour vehicle.



Chevrolet Owner Centre(Canada) chevroletowner.ca

Take a trip to the Chevrolet OwnerCentre:. Chat live with online help

representatives.. Use the Vehicle Tools section.. Access third party enthusiast

sites and social media networks.. Locate owner resources such as

lease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips, and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner manual foryour vehicle, quickly and easily.

. Find theChevrolet-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.caor call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-800-243-8872; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.



. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide the

claims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Chevrolet dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,

must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may be



restricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometers from where yourtrip was started to qualify.General Motors of CanadaLimited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receipt

to Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”



furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer can offerone of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone-way or round-trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofyour dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed byGM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through afriend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.

Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific information aboutavailability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.



General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice to

ensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/

corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.



Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13-5.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Insurance company and policynumber.

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3-19.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycled



original GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.



Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.



Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, MailCode: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.



Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data arerecorded by your vehicle only if anon-trivial crash situation occurs; nodata are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender,age, and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, couldcombine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,

if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped withOnStar® and has an activesubscription, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation;collisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to the



OnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

Infotainment SystemUsing the navigation system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. See theinfotainment manual for informationon stored data and for deletioninstructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or record

personal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.



2 NOTES


OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Overview

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices.

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:. Solid Green: System is ready.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.

PressQ or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Press= to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires the available Directionsand Connections service plan.

PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions. Requires

the available Directions andConnections service plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check of thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.


14-2 OnStar

Press the OnStar Emergency button> to get a priority connection to anEmergency Advisor available24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get assistance in severe

weather or other crisis andevacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the built-in system can automaticallyconnect to help in most crashes,even if help cannot be requested.

Press> to connect to anEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can providecritical information to emergencypersonnel. The Advisor is alsotrained to offer critical assistance inemergency situations.

SecurityOnStar provides services like StolenVehicle Assistance, Remote IgnitionBlock, and Roadside Assistance,if equipped. OnStar can unlock thevehicle doors remotely, if equippedwith automatic door locks, and canhelp police locate the vehicle if it isstolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires theDirections and Connectionsservice plan.

PressQ to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen, if equipped.Destinations can also be forwardedto the vehicle from MapQuest.com.The OnStar mapping database iscontinuously updated. For coveragemaps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.)or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.


OnStar 14-3

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say“Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.

Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with theaddress and the distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Allows subscribersto send destinations fromMapQuest.com to their Turn-by-TurnNavigation or screen-basednavigation system. When ready, thedirections will be downloaded to thevehicle.

Destination Download: PressQ,then request the Advisor todownload directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle.

After the call ends, press the “Go”button on the navigation screen tobegin driving directions.

If directions are downloaded to thenavigation system, the route canonly be canceled through thenavigation system.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go. Forinformation about eNav, DestinationDownload, and coverage maps seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowscalls to be made and received fromthe vehicle. The vehicle can also becontrolled through the OnStarRemoteLink® mobile app. Forcoverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).


14-4 OnStar

OnStar Mobile App

Download the OnStar RemoteLinkmobile app to select Apple®,Android™, and BlackBerry® devicesto check vehicle fuel level, oil life,or tire pressure; to start the vehicle(if equipped) or unlock it; or toconnect to an OnStar Advisor. ForOnStar RemoteLink information andcompatibility, see www.onstar.com(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

Hands-Free Calling

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing.System responds: “911.”

4. Say “Call.” System responds:“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is,”then says the number.

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. Systemresponds: “About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to tryagain. System responds: “OK,storing <name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”


OnStar 14-5

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics willperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes, andmajor vehicle systems. It alsochecks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System. If anOn-Demand Diagnostics check isneeded between e-mails, pressQ,and an Advisor can run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information. If OnStarreceives information that vehicleownership has changed, OnStarmay send a voice message to thevehicle, requesting updated accountinformation.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible after acquiring the vehicle.The Advisor will update vehiclerecords and will explain the OnStarservice offers and options available.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions:. Call 888-4-ONSTAR

(888-466-7827).. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for features


14-6 OnStar

to function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar service may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems beyond thecontrol of OnStar may preventservice such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of the

vehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.


Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PressQ for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to the deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTY

system can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

OnStar.com (U.S.) or OnStar.ca(Canada)

The website provides access toaccount information, allowsmanagement of the OnStarsubscription, and viewing of videosof each service. Get subscriptionplan pricing and sign up for OnStarVehicle Diagnostics. Click on the“My Account” tab on the homepage. The website navigation andservices provided may vary bycountry.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. You will be prompted tochange the PIN the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. To


OnStar 14-7

change the OnStar PIN, call OnStarand provide the Advisor with thecurrent number.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Themanufacturer of the vehiclefurnishes detailed warrantyinformation.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages.PressQ and ask an Advisor.Advisors are available in English,Spanish and French. Availablelanguages may vary by country.

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleAssistance after the vehicle hasbeen off continuously for five days.After five days, OnStar can contact

Roadside Assistance and alocksmith to help gain access to thevehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses, or parkinggarages; or in an area with verydense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to callOnStar. However, OnStar couldhave difficulty identifying theexact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

. A temporary loss of GPS cancause loss of the ability to senda Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.The Advisor may give a verbal

route or may ask for a call backafter the vehicle is driven into anopen area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Avoid placing items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.


14-8 OnStar

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9-50. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada).Privacy-sensitive users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communicationscannot be assured. Third partiesmay unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - libcurl and unzipacknowledgments

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software. Beloware the notices and licensesassociated with this software:

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that theabove copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, useor other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license. Thedefinitive version of this document


OnStar 14-9

should be available atftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley,Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs,Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shall

Info-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that is

permitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binary ordisabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existing portswith new graphical interfaces,and dynamic, shared, or staticlibrary versions–must be plainlymarked as such and must not bemisrepresented as being theoriginal source. Such alteredversions also must not bemisrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including, butnot limited to, labeling of thealtered versions with the names“Info-ZIP” (or any variationthereof, including, but not limitedto, different capitalizations),“Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or“MacZip” without the explicitpermission of Info-ZIP. Suchaltered versions are furtherprohibited frommisrepresentative use of the


14-10 OnStar

Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its own sourceand binary releases.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50

Additional InformationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-10Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18

Airbag System (cont'd)What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-15AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25

Passenger Status Indicator . . . 5-11Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

AlertSide Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . .9-42

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11AntennaMulti-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Assistance Systems forDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

Assistance Systems forParking and Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-36

AudioBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-32

Audio SystemBackglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .7-21Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20

AutomaticDimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . .10-9

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-40

Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21


i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-23Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41BrakeParking, Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-14

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-15Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-25

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

CCaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-47Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Capacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-11CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-22

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-34

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39, 3-41Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31

CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Competitive Driving Mode . . . . . 9-31Compressor Kit, TireSealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Configure Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60ConnectionsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3


INDEX i-3

ControlTraction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Engine Temperature Gauge . . . 5-9

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . .13-11

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14Database CoverageExplanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Destination Download,OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59

Destination, Navigation . . . . . . . . 7-48DevicesAuxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-40USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34

DiagnosticsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Door (cont'd)Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Rear Seat Pass-Through . . . . . . 3-7

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-3Driver Assistance Systems . . . . 9-35Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

DrivingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-40Competitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-18Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-10Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1


i-4 INDEX

EElectric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . 9-27Electric Parking Brake Light . . . 5-15Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

EmergencyOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-5Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . 5-9Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Cooling System Messages . . .5-27Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3

Engine (cont'd)Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-22Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1

FFeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81

FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . . .10-9Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Forward Collision Alert(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Front SeatsHeated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-47Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-19


INDEX i-5

Fuel (cont'd)Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46Requirements, California . . . . .9-47System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Engine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

GGasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Global PositioningSystem (GPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

HHazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-20High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-1Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-20

Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-29Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

IIf the System Needs Service . . . 7-68Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15IndicatorVehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

InfoQuick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-15


i-6 INDEX

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 1-2Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 2-17Internet RadioPandora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-29Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-36LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-12

Lamps (cont'd)Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

Lane Departure WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-14Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .5-15

Lights (cont'd)Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-18Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-1Lane Departure Warning . . . . . .5-16Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . 5-9Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Service Electric ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Service Vehicle Soon . . . . . . . . .5-14StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . 9-32LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5


INDEX i-7

Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-19Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-12Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Map Data Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5MenuConfigure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-60

MessagesBattery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-27Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Object Detection System . . . . .5-29Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-31Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

MessagingText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-82

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Automatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . 2-17Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

NNavigationDestination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-46Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-42

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-15


i-8 INDEX

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .10-8Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-26Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4OnStar®

System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19OnStar® AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-3OnStar® DestinationDownload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59

OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

PPandora Internet Radio . . . . . . . . 7-22ParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19

ParkingBrake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-23

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-21Parking or BackingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-36

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-20Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-2

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-75

Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-18Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15

Problems with RouteGuidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-7

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2


INDEX i-9

QQuick Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-15Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32

Rear SeatPass-Through Door . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Rearview MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-26Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-13

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Ride Control SystemsLimited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-32Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-13Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-12


i-10 INDEX

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56SeatsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated and Ventilated Front . . . 3-6Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-3Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39, 3-41

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-14Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Vehicle Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Service Electric ParkingBrake Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-21Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Storage AreasCenter Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv


INDEX i-11

Symbols, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46SystemForward CollisionAlert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2, 13-15System Needs Service . . . . . . . . 7-68SystemsDriver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-15Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-43Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

Tires (cont'd)Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-42Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Sealant and CompressorKit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-52When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35TowingRecreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-72Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

Track Events andCompetitive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-32Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

TrailerTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3


i-12 INDEX

UUniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

UpdatesMap Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-68Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-66Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-32Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Service Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . 5-17

Vehicle CareStoring the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-62

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6ViewingPictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-31

Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . .9-44

Warning LightForward CollisionAlert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-32Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

WindshieldReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-23

2014 Chevrolet SS Sedan Owner Manual M

Documents

Transcript of 2014 Chevrolet SS Sedan Owner Manual M